Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1 | //===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===// |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2 | // |
John Criswell | b576c94 | 2003-10-20 19:43:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3 | // The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure |
| 4 | // |
Chris Lattner | 4ee451d | 2007-12-29 20:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 5 | // This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source |
| 6 | // License. See LICENSE.TXT for details. |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 7 | // |
John Criswell | b576c94 | 2003-10-20 19:43:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 8 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 9 | // |
Chris Lattner | bb190ac | 2002-10-08 21:36:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 10 | // Peephole optimize the CFG. |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 11 | // |
| 12 | //===----------------------------------------------------------------------===// |
| 13 | |
Chris Lattner | 218a822 | 2004-06-20 01:13:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 14 | #define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg" |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 15 | #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h" |
Chandler Carruth | d04a8d4 | 2012-12-03 16:50:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 16 | #include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h" |
| 17 | #include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h" |
| 18 | #include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h" |
| 19 | #include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h" |
| 20 | #include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h" |
| 21 | #include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h" |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 22 | #include "llvm/Analysis/AliasAnalysis.h" |
Chandler Carruth | d04a8d4 | 2012-12-03 16:50:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 23 | #include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h" |
Chandler Carruth | be04929 | 2013-01-07 03:08:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 24 | #include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h" |
Chandler Carruth | d04a8d4 | 2012-12-03 16:50:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 25 | #include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h" |
Chandler Carruth | 0b8c9a8 | 2013-01-02 11:36:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 26 | #include "llvm/IR/Constants.h" |
| 27 | #include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h" |
| 28 | #include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h" |
| 29 | #include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h" |
| 30 | #include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h" |
| 31 | #include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h" |
| 32 | #include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h" |
| 33 | #include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h" |
| 34 | #include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h" |
| 35 | #include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h" |
| 36 | #include "llvm/IR/Module.h" |
| 37 | #include "llvm/IR/Operator.h" |
| 38 | #include "llvm/IR/Type.h" |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 39 | #include "llvm/Support/CFG.h" |
Evan Cheng | c3f507f | 2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 40 | #include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h" |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 41 | #include "llvm/Support/ConstantRange.h" |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 42 | #include "llvm/Support/Debug.h" |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 43 | #include "llvm/Support/NoFolder.h" |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 44 | #include "llvm/Support/PatternMatch.h" |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 45 | #include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h" |
Chandler Carruth | 06cb8ed | 2012-06-29 12:38:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 46 | #include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h" |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 47 | #include <algorithm> |
Chris Lattner | 698f96f | 2004-10-18 04:07:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 48 | #include <map> |
Chandler Carruth | d04a8d4 | 2012-12-03 16:50:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 49 | #include <set> |
Chris Lattner | f7703df | 2004-01-09 06:12:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 50 | using namespace llvm; |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 51 | using namespace PatternMatch; |
Brian Gaeke | d0fde30 | 2003-11-11 22:41:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 52 | |
Peter Collingbourne | 57808b3 | 2011-04-29 18:47:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 53 | static cl::opt<unsigned> |
| 54 | PHINodeFoldingThreshold("phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(1), |
| 55 | cl::desc("Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 1)")); |
| 56 | |
Evan Cheng | c3f507f | 2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 57 | static cl::opt<bool> |
| 58 | DupRet("simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false), |
| 59 | cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches")); |
| 60 | |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 61 | static cl::opt<bool> |
| 62 | SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), |
| 63 | cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block")); |
| 64 | |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 65 | static cl::opt<bool> |
| 66 | HoistCondStores("simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), |
| 67 | cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store preceeds")); |
| 68 | |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 69 | static cl::opt<bool> |
| 70 | ParallelAndOr("simplifycfg-parallel-and-or", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true), |
| 71 | cl::desc("Use parallel-and-or mode for branch conditions")); |
| 72 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 73 | STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps"); |
Hans Wennborg | 50b7d70 | 2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 74 | STATISTIC(NumLookupTables, "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables"); |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 75 | STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons, "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block"); |
Hans Wennborg | 50b7d70 | 2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 76 | STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions"); |
Evan Cheng | 502a4f5 | 2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 77 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 78 | namespace { |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 79 | /// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch. |
| 80 | struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase { |
| 81 | ConstantInt *Value; |
| 82 | BasicBlock *Dest; |
| 83 | |
| 84 | ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest) |
| 85 | : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {} |
| 86 | |
| 87 | bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const { |
| 88 | // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing. |
| 89 | return Value < RHS.Value; |
| 90 | } |
Benjamin Kramer | 8e13ded | 2012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 91 | |
| 92 | bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 93 | }; |
| 94 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 95 | class SimplifyCFGOpt { |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 96 | const TargetTransformInfo &TTI; |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 97 | const DataLayout *const TD; |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 98 | AliasAnalysis *AA; |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 99 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 100 | Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI); |
| 101 | BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI, |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 102 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 103 | bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI, |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 104 | BasicBlock *Pred, |
| 105 | IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 106 | bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI, |
| 107 | IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 108 | |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 109 | bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Bill Wendling | aa5abe8 | 2012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 110 | bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 111 | bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI); |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 112 | bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 113 | bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI); |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 114 | bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <> &Builder); |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 115 | bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder <>&Builder); |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 116 | /// \brief Use parallel-and or parallel-or to generate conditions for |
| 117 | /// conditional branches. |
| 118 | bool SimplifyParallelAndOr(BasicBlock *BB, IRBuilder<> &Builder, Pass *P = 0); |
| 119 | /// \brief If \param BB is the merge block of an if-region, attempt to merge |
| 120 | /// the if-region with an adjacent if-region upstream if two if-regions |
| 121 | /// contain identical instructions. |
| 122 | bool MergeIfRegion(BasicBlock *BB, IRBuilder<> &Builder, Pass *P = 0); |
Rafael Espindola | 15658b2 | 2013-07-28 23:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 123 | /// \brief Compare a pair of blocks: \p Block1 and \p Block2, which |
| 124 | /// are from two if-regions whose entry blocks are \p Head1 and \p |
| 125 | /// Head2. \returns true if \p Block1 and \p Block2 contain identical |
| 126 | /// instructions, and have no memory reference alias with \p Head2. |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 127 | /// This is used as a legality check for merging if-regions. |
| 128 | bool CompareIfRegionBlock(BasicBlock *Head1, BasicBlock *Head2, |
| 129 | BasicBlock *Block1, BasicBlock *Block2); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 130 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 131 | public: |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 132 | SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout *TD, |
| 133 | AliasAnalysis *AA) |
| 134 | : TTI(TTI), TD(TD), AA(AA) {} |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 135 | bool run(BasicBlock *BB); |
| 136 | }; |
| 137 | } |
| 138 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 139 | /// SafeToMergeTerminators - Return true if it is safe to merge these two |
| 140 | /// terminator instructions together. |
| 141 | /// |
| 142 | static bool SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2) { |
| 143 | if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self! |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 144 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 145 | // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common |
| 146 | // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has |
| 147 | // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks. |
| 148 | BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent(); |
| 149 | BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent(); |
Chris Lattner | c995123 | 2007-04-02 01:44:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 150 | SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB)); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 151 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 152 | for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I) |
| 153 | if (SI1Succs.count(*I)) |
| 154 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin(); |
| 155 | isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) { |
| 156 | PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI); |
| 157 | if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != |
| 158 | PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) |
| 159 | return false; |
| 160 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 161 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 162 | return true; |
| 163 | } |
| 164 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 165 | /// isProfitableToFoldUnconditional - Return true if it is safe and profitable |
| 166 | /// to merge these two terminator instructions together, where SI1 is an |
| 167 | /// unconditional branch. PhiNodes will store all PHI nodes in common |
| 168 | /// successors. |
| 169 | /// |
| 170 | static bool isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, |
| 171 | BranchInst *SI2, |
Nick Lewycky | edb5842 | 2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 172 | Instruction *Cond, |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 173 | SmallVectorImpl<PHINode*> &PhiNodes) { |
| 174 | if (SI1 == SI2) return false; // Can't merge with self! |
| 175 | assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional()); |
| 176 | |
| 177 | // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 178 | // common successors: |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 179 | // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch; |
| 180 | // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch; |
| 181 | // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands. |
| 182 | CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition()); |
| 183 | if (!Ci2) return false; |
| 184 | if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) && |
| 185 | Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) && |
| 186 | !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) && |
| 187 | Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0))) |
| 188 | return false; |
| 189 | |
| 190 | BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent(); |
| 191 | BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent(); |
| 192 | SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB)); |
| 193 | for (succ_iterator I = succ_begin(SI2BB), E = succ_end(SI2BB); I != E; ++I) |
| 194 | if (SI1Succs.count(*I)) |
| 195 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = (*I)->begin(); |
| 196 | isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) { |
| 197 | PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI); |
| 198 | if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond || |
Nick Lewycky | edb5842 | 2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 199 | !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB))) |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 200 | return false; |
| 201 | PhiNodes.push_back(PN); |
| 202 | } |
| 203 | return true; |
| 204 | } |
| 205 | |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 206 | /// AddPredecessorToBlock - Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will |
| 207 | /// now be entries in it from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be |
| 208 | /// flowing into the PHI nodes will be the same as those coming in from |
| 209 | /// ExistPred, an existing predecessor of Succ. |
| 210 | static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred, |
| 211 | BasicBlock *ExistPred) { |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 212 | if (!isa<PHINode>(Succ->begin())) return; // Quick exit if nothing to do |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 213 | |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 214 | PHINode *PN; |
| 215 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); |
| 216 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)); ++I) |
| 217 | PN->addIncoming(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred); |
Chris Lattner | 2bdcb56 | 2005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 218 | } |
| 219 | |
Chris Lattner | 7e66348 | 2005-08-03 00:11:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 220 | |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 221 | /// GetIfCondition - Given a basic block (BB) with two predecessors, |
| 222 | /// check to see if the merge at this block is due |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 223 | /// to an "if condition". If so, return the boolean condition that determines |
| 224 | /// which entry into BB will be taken. Also, return by references the block |
| 225 | /// that will be entered from if the condition is true, and the block that will |
| 226 | /// be entered if the condition is false. |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 227 | /// |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 228 | /// This does no checking to see if the true/false blocks have large or unsavory |
| 229 | /// instructions in them. |
Chris Lattner | 73c50a6 | 2010-12-14 07:00:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 230 | static Value *GetIfCondition(BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *&IfTrue, |
| 231 | BasicBlock *&IfFalse) { |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 232 | PHINode *SomePHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()); |
| 233 | BasicBlock *Pred1 = NULL; |
| 234 | BasicBlock *Pred2 = NULL; |
| 235 | |
| 236 | if (SomePHI) { |
| 237 | if (SomePHI->getNumIncomingValues() != 2) |
| 238 | return NULL; |
| 239 | Pred1 = SomePHI->getIncomingBlock(0); |
| 240 | Pred2 = SomePHI->getIncomingBlock(1); |
| 241 | } else { |
| 242 | pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); |
| 243 | if (PI == PE) // No predecessor |
| 244 | return NULL; |
| 245 | Pred1 = *PI++; |
| 246 | if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor |
| 247 | return NULL; |
| 248 | Pred2 = *PI++; |
| 249 | if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors |
| 250 | return NULL; |
| 251 | } |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 252 | |
| 253 | // We can only handle branches. Other control flow will be lowered to |
| 254 | // branches if possible anyway. |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 255 | BranchInst *Pred1Br = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Pred1->getTerminator()); |
| 256 | BranchInst *Pred2Br = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Pred2->getTerminator()); |
| 257 | if (Pred1Br == 0 || Pred2Br == 0) |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 258 | return 0; |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 259 | |
| 260 | // Eliminate code duplication by ensuring that Pred1Br is conditional if |
| 261 | // either are. |
| 262 | if (Pred2Br->isConditional()) { |
| 263 | // If both branches are conditional, we don't have an "if statement". In |
| 264 | // reality, we could transform this case, but since the condition will be |
| 265 | // required anyway, we stand no chance of eliminating it, so the xform is |
| 266 | // probably not profitable. |
| 267 | if (Pred1Br->isConditional()) |
| 268 | return 0; |
| 269 | |
| 270 | std::swap(Pred1, Pred2); |
| 271 | std::swap(Pred1Br, Pred2Br); |
| 272 | } |
| 273 | |
| 274 | if (Pred1Br->isConditional()) { |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 275 | // The only thing we have to watch out for here is to make sure that Pred2 |
| 276 | // doesn't have incoming edges from other blocks. If it does, the condition |
| 277 | // doesn't dominate BB. |
| 278 | if (Pred2->getSinglePredecessor() == 0) |
| 279 | return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 280 | |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 281 | // If we found a conditional branch predecessor, make sure that it branches |
| 282 | // to BB and Pred2Br. If it doesn't, this isn't an "if statement". |
| 283 | if (Pred1Br->getSuccessor(0) == BB && |
| 284 | Pred1Br->getSuccessor(1) == Pred2) { |
| 285 | IfTrue = Pred1; |
| 286 | IfFalse = Pred2; |
| 287 | } else if (Pred1Br->getSuccessor(0) == Pred2 && |
| 288 | Pred1Br->getSuccessor(1) == BB) { |
| 289 | IfTrue = Pred2; |
| 290 | IfFalse = Pred1; |
| 291 | } else { |
| 292 | // We know that one arm of the conditional goes to BB, so the other must |
| 293 | // go somewhere unrelated, and this must not be an "if statement". |
| 294 | return 0; |
| 295 | } |
| 296 | |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 297 | return Pred1Br->getCondition(); |
| 298 | } |
| 299 | |
| 300 | // Ok, if we got here, both predecessors end with an unconditional branch to |
| 301 | // BB. Don't panic! If both blocks only have a single (identical) |
| 302 | // predecessor, and THAT is a conditional branch, then we're all ok! |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 303 | BasicBlock *CommonPred = Pred1->getSinglePredecessor(); |
| 304 | if (CommonPred == 0 || CommonPred != Pred2->getSinglePredecessor()) |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 305 | return 0; |
| 306 | |
| 307 | // Otherwise, if this is a conditional branch, then we can use it! |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 308 | BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(CommonPred->getTerminator()); |
| 309 | if (BI == 0) return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 310 | |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 311 | assert(BI->isConditional() && "Two successors but not conditional?"); |
| 312 | if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == Pred1) { |
| 313 | IfTrue = Pred1; |
| 314 | IfFalse = Pred2; |
| 315 | } else { |
| 316 | IfTrue = Pred2; |
| 317 | IfFalse = Pred1; |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 318 | } |
Chris Lattner | 995ba1b | 2010-12-14 07:15:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 319 | return BI->getCondition(); |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 320 | } |
| 321 | |
David Majnemer | f7dad78 | 2013-06-01 19:43:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 322 | /// ComputeSpeculationCost - Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 323 | /// given instruction, which is assumed to be safe to speculate. 1 means |
| 324 | /// cheap, 2 means less cheap, and UINT_MAX means prohibitively expensive. |
| 325 | static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I) { |
| 326 | assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) && |
| 327 | "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!"); |
| 328 | switch (Operator::getOpcode(I)) { |
| 329 | default: |
| 330 | // In doubt, be conservative. |
| 331 | return UINT_MAX; |
| 332 | case Instruction::GetElementPtr: |
| 333 | // GEPs are cheap if all indices are constant. |
| 334 | if (!cast<GEPOperator>(I)->hasAllConstantIndices()) |
| 335 | return UINT_MAX; |
| 336 | return 1; |
| 337 | case Instruction::Load: |
| 338 | case Instruction::Add: |
| 339 | case Instruction::Sub: |
| 340 | case Instruction::And: |
| 341 | case Instruction::Or: |
| 342 | case Instruction::Xor: |
| 343 | case Instruction::Shl: |
| 344 | case Instruction::LShr: |
| 345 | case Instruction::AShr: |
| 346 | case Instruction::ICmp: |
| 347 | case Instruction::Trunc: |
| 348 | case Instruction::ZExt: |
| 349 | case Instruction::SExt: |
| 350 | return 1; // These are all cheap. |
| 351 | |
| 352 | case Instruction::Call: |
| 353 | case Instruction::Select: |
| 354 | return 2; |
| 355 | } |
| 356 | } |
| 357 | |
Bill Wendling | 5049fa6 | 2009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 358 | /// DominatesMergePoint - If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as |
| 359 | /// accepted above, return true if the specified value dominates the block. We |
| 360 | /// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case |
| 361 | /// which works well enough for us. |
| 362 | /// |
| 363 | /// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 364 | /// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands |
| 365 | /// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and |
| 366 | /// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the |
| 367 | /// set and true is returned. |
| 368 | /// |
| 369 | /// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for |
| 370 | /// Select whose cost is 2. |
| 371 | /// |
| 372 | /// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of |
| 373 | /// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than |
| 374 | /// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined. |
Chris Lattner | 9c07866 | 2004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 375 | static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB, |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 376 | SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> *AggressiveInsts, |
| 377 | unsigned &CostRemaining) { |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 378 | Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V); |
Chris Lattner | b74b181 | 2006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 379 | if (!I) { |
| 380 | // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs |
| 381 | // can be executed unconditionally. |
| 382 | if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V)) |
| 383 | if (C->canTrap()) |
| 384 | return false; |
| 385 | return true; |
| 386 | } |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 387 | BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent(); |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 388 | |
Chris Lattner | da895d6 | 2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 389 | // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 390 | // the bottom of this block. |
| 391 | if (PBB == BB) return false; |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 392 | |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 393 | // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional |
| 394 | // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 395 | // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region. |
| 396 | BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator()); |
| 397 | if (BI == 0 || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB) |
| 398 | return true; |
Eli Friedman | 0b79a77 | 2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 399 | |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 400 | // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider |
| 401 | // instructions in the 'if region'. |
| 402 | if (AggressiveInsts == 0) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 403 | |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 404 | // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again. |
| 405 | if (AggressiveInsts->count(I)) return true; |
| 406 | |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 407 | // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to |
| 408 | // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it |
| 409 | // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out. |
Dan Gohman | f042660 | 2011-12-14 23:49:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 410 | if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I)) |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 411 | return false; |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 412 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 413 | unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I); |
Chris Lattner | 570751c | 2004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 414 | |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 415 | if (Cost > CostRemaining) |
| 416 | return false; |
| 417 | |
| 418 | CostRemaining -= Cost; |
| 419 | |
| 420 | // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do |
| 421 | // not take us over the cost threshold. |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 422 | for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 423 | if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining)) |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 424 | return false; |
| 425 | // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction. |
| 426 | AggressiveInsts->insert(I); |
Chris Lattner | 723c66d | 2004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 427 | return true; |
| 428 | } |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 429 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 430 | /// GetConstantInt - Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr |
| 431 | /// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 432 | static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout *TD) { |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 433 | // Normal constant int. |
| 434 | ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V); |
Duncan Sands | 1df9859 | 2010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 435 | if (CI || !TD || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy()) |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 436 | return CI; |
| 437 | |
| 438 | // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized |
| 439 | // ConstantInt if possible. |
Duncan Sands | 7ed4f94 | 2012-10-29 17:31:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 440 | IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(TD->getIntPtrType(V->getType())); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 441 | |
| 442 | // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*). |
| 443 | if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V)) |
| 444 | return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0); |
| 445 | |
| 446 | // IntToPtr const int. |
| 447 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V)) |
| 448 | if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr) |
| 449 | if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) { |
| 450 | // The constant is very likely to have the right type already. |
| 451 | if (CI->getType() == PtrTy) |
| 452 | return CI; |
| 453 | else |
| 454 | return cast<ConstantInt> |
| 455 | (ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false)); |
| 456 | } |
| 457 | return 0; |
| 458 | } |
| 459 | |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 460 | /// GatherConstantCompares - Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together |
| 461 | /// collection of icmp eq/ne instructions that compare a value against a |
| 462 | /// constant, return the value being compared, and stick the constant into the |
| 463 | /// Values vector. |
Chris Lattner | 28acc13 | 2010-12-13 03:30:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 464 | static Value * |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 465 | GatherConstantCompares(Value *V, std::vector<ConstantInt*> &Vals, Value *&Extra, |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 466 | const DataLayout *TD, bool isEQ, unsigned &UsedICmps) { |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 467 | Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V); |
| 468 | if (I == 0) return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 469 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 470 | // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases. |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 471 | if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) { |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 472 | if (ConstantInt *C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), TD)) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 473 | Value *RHSVal; |
| 474 | ConstantInt *RHSC; |
| 475 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 476 | if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ:ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 477 | // (x & ~2^x) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^x |
| 478 | // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares. |
| 479 | if (match(ICI->getOperand(0), |
| 480 | m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC)))) { |
| 481 | APInt Not = ~RHSC->getValue(); |
| 482 | if (Not.isPowerOf2()) { |
| 483 | Vals.push_back(C); |
| 484 | Vals.push_back( |
| 485 | ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(), C->getValue() | Not)); |
| 486 | UsedICmps++; |
| 487 | return RHSVal; |
| 488 | } |
| 489 | } |
| 490 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 491 | UsedICmps++; |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 492 | Vals.push_back(C); |
| 493 | return I->getOperand(0); |
| 494 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 495 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 496 | // If we have "x ult 3" comparison, for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to |
| 497 | // the set. |
| 498 | ConstantRange Span = |
Chris Lattner | a37029c | 2010-12-18 20:22:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 499 | ConstantRange::makeICmpRegion(ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 500 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 501 | // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range |
| 502 | // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine. |
| 503 | bool hasAdd = |
| 504 | match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_ConstantInt(RHSC))); |
| 505 | if (hasAdd) |
| 506 | Span = Span.subtract(RHSC->getValue()); |
| 507 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 508 | // If this is an and/!= check then we want to optimize "x ugt 2" into |
| 509 | // x != 0 && x != 1. |
| 510 | if (!isEQ) |
| 511 | Span = Span.inverse(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 512 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 513 | // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch. |
Nick Lewycky | f460bf8 | 2012-01-19 18:19:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 514 | if (Span.getSetSize().ugt(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 515 | return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 516 | |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 517 | for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp) |
| 518 | Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(V->getContext(), Tmp)); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 519 | UsedICmps++; |
Benjamin Kramer | 32d15d9 | 2013-07-04 14:22:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 520 | return hasAdd ? RHSVal : I->getOperand(0); |
Chris Lattner | e27db74 | 2010-12-17 06:20:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 521 | } |
Chris Lattner | 662269d | 2010-12-13 04:18:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 522 | return 0; |
| 523 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 524 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 525 | // Otherwise, we can only handle an | or &, depending on isEQ. |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 526 | if (I->getOpcode() != (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) |
Chris Lattner | 662269d | 2010-12-13 04:18:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 527 | return 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 528 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 529 | unsigned NumValsBeforeLHS = Vals.size(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 530 | unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeLHS = UsedICmps; |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 531 | if (Value *LHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(0), Vals, Extra, TD, |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 532 | isEQ, UsedICmps)) { |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 533 | unsigned NumVals = Vals.size(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 534 | unsigned UsedICmpsBeforeRHS = UsedICmps; |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 535 | if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, TD, |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 536 | isEQ, UsedICmps)) { |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 537 | if (LHS == RHS) |
| 538 | return LHS; |
Chris Lattner | 92407e5 | 2010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 539 | Vals.resize(NumVals); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 540 | UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeRHS; |
Chris Lattner | 0aa749b | 2010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 541 | } |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 542 | |
| 543 | // The RHS of the or/and can't be folded in and we haven't used "Extra" yet, |
| 544 | // set it and return success. |
| 545 | if (Extra == 0 || Extra == I->getOperand(1)) { |
| 546 | Extra = I->getOperand(1); |
| 547 | return LHS; |
| 548 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 549 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 550 | Vals.resize(NumValsBeforeLHS); |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 551 | UsedICmps = UsedICmpsBeforeLHS; |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 552 | return 0; |
Anton Korobeynikov | 07e6e56 | 2008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 553 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 554 | |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 555 | // If the LHS can't be folded in, but Extra is available and RHS can, try to |
| 556 | // use LHS as Extra. |
| 557 | if (Extra == 0 || Extra == I->getOperand(0)) { |
Chris Lattner | 92407e5 | 2010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 558 | Value *OldExtra = Extra; |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 559 | Extra = I->getOperand(0); |
| 560 | if (Value *RHS = GatherConstantCompares(I->getOperand(1), Vals, Extra, TD, |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 561 | isEQ, UsedICmps)) |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 562 | return RHS; |
Chris Lattner | 92407e5 | 2010-12-13 07:41:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 563 | assert(Vals.size() == NumValsBeforeLHS); |
| 564 | Extra = OldExtra; |
Chris Lattner | 7312a22 | 2010-12-13 04:50:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 565 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 566 | |
Chris Lattner | 0d56008 | 2004-02-24 05:38:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 567 | return 0; |
| 568 | } |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 569 | |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 570 | static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) { |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 571 | Instruction *Cond = 0; |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 572 | if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) { |
| 573 | Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition()); |
| 574 | } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) { |
| 575 | if (BI->isConditional()) |
| 576 | Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition()); |
Frits van Bommel | 7ac40c3 | 2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 577 | } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) { |
| 578 | Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress()); |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 579 | } |
| 580 | |
| 581 | TI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 582 | if (Cond) RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond); |
| 583 | } |
| 584 | |
Chris Lattner | 9fd4955 | 2008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 585 | /// isValueEqualityComparison - Return true if the specified terminator checks |
| 586 | /// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value. |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 587 | Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) { |
| 588 | Value *CV = 0; |
Chris Lattner | 4bebf08 | 2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 589 | if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) { |
| 590 | // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their |
| 591 | // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor. |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 592 | if (SI->getNumSuccessors()*std::distance(pred_begin(SI->getParent()), |
| 593 | pred_end(SI->getParent())) <= 128) |
| 594 | CV = SI->getCondition(); |
| 595 | } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 596 | if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse()) |
Reid Spencer | e4d87aa | 2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 597 | if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) |
David Majnemer | 404fa72 | 2013-06-03 20:39:50 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 598 | if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), TD)) |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 599 | CV = ICI->getOperand(0); |
| 600 | |
| 601 | // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast. |
Chandler Carruth | ece6c6b | 2012-11-01 08:07:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 602 | if (TD && CV && CV->getType() == TD->getIntPtrType(CV->getContext())) |
| 603 | if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 604 | CV = PTII->getOperand(0); |
| 605 | return CV; |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 606 | } |
| 607 | |
Bill Wendling | 5049fa6 | 2009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 608 | /// GetValueEqualityComparisonCases - Given a value comparison instruction, |
| 609 | /// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block. |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 610 | BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt:: |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 611 | GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TerminatorInst *TI, |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 612 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> |
| 613 | &Cases) { |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 614 | if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) { |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 615 | Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases()); |
| 616 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e; ++i) |
| 617 | Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(i.getCaseValue(), |
| 618 | i.getCaseSuccessor())); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 619 | return SI->getDefaultDest(); |
| 620 | } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 621 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 622 | BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI); |
Reid Spencer | e4d87aa | 2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 623 | ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition()); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 624 | BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE); |
| 625 | Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), |
| 626 | TD), |
| 627 | Succ)); |
Reid Spencer | e4d87aa | 2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 628 | return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 629 | } |
| 630 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 631 | |
| 632 | /// EliminateBlockCases - Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries |
| 633 | /// in the list that match the specified block. |
| 634 | static void EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB, |
| 635 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 8e13ded | 2012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 636 | Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end()); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 637 | } |
| 638 | |
| 639 | /// ValuesOverlap - Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as |
| 640 | /// well. |
| 641 | static bool |
| 642 | ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1, |
| 643 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase > &C2) { |
| 644 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2; |
| 645 | |
| 646 | // Make V1 be smaller than V2. |
| 647 | if (V1->size() > V2->size()) |
| 648 | std::swap(V1, V2); |
| 649 | |
| 650 | if (V1->size() == 0) return false; |
| 651 | if (V1->size() == 1) { |
| 652 | // Just scan V2. |
| 653 | ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value; |
| 654 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 655 | if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value) |
| 656 | return true; |
| 657 | } |
| 658 | |
| 659 | // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element. |
| 660 | array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end()); |
| 661 | array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end()); |
| 662 | unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size(); |
| 663 | while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) { |
| 664 | if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value) |
| 665 | return true; |
| 666 | if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value) |
| 667 | ++i1; |
| 668 | else |
| 669 | ++i2; |
| 670 | } |
| 671 | return false; |
| 672 | } |
| 673 | |
Bill Wendling | 5049fa6 | 2009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 674 | /// SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor - If TI is known to be a |
| 675 | /// terminator instruction and its block is known to only have a single |
| 676 | /// predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is also a value |
| 677 | /// comparison with the same value, and if that comparison determines the |
| 678 | /// outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a very limited |
| 679 | /// form of jump threading. |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 680 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt:: |
| 681 | SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI, |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 682 | BasicBlock *Pred, |
| 683 | IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 684 | Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator()); |
| 685 | if (!PredVal) return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor. |
| 686 | |
| 687 | Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); |
| 688 | assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!"); |
| 689 | if (ThisVal != PredVal) return false; // Different predicates. |
| 690 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 691 | // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how |
| 692 | // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it. |
| 693 | |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 694 | // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 695 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 696 | BasicBlock *PredDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), |
| 697 | PredCases); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 698 | EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases. |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 699 | |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 700 | // Find information about how control leaves this block. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 701 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 702 | BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 703 | EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases. |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 704 | |
| 705 | // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially |
| 706 | // simplify TI based on this knowledge. |
| 707 | if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) { |
| 708 | // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in |
| 709 | // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we |
| 710 | // can simplify TI. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 711 | if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases)) |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 712 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 713 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 714 | if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) { |
| 715 | // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a |
| 716 | // uncond br. |
| 717 | assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!"); |
| 718 | // Insert the new branch. |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 719 | Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 720 | (void) NI; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 721 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 722 | // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 723 | ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent()); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 724 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 725 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator() |
| 726 | << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n"); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 727 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 728 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI); |
| 729 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 730 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 731 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 732 | SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI); |
| 733 | // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 734 | SmallPtrSet<Constant*, 16> DeadCases; |
| 735 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 736 | DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 737 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 738 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator() |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 739 | << "Through successor TI: " << *TI); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 740 | |
Manman Ren | ad28907 | 2012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 741 | // Collect branch weights into a vector. |
| 742 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights; |
| 743 | MDNode* MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof); |
| 744 | bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases()); |
| 745 | if (HasWeight) |
| 746 | for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e; |
| 747 | ++MD_i) { |
| 748 | ConstantInt* CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i)); |
| 749 | assert(CI); |
| 750 | Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue()); |
| 751 | } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 752 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) { |
| 753 | --i; |
| 754 | if (DeadCases.count(i.getCaseValue())) { |
Manman Ren | ad28907 | 2012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 755 | if (HasWeight) { |
| 756 | std::swap(Weights[i.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back()); |
| 757 | Weights.pop_back(); |
| 758 | } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 759 | i.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent()); |
| 760 | SI->removeCase(i); |
| 761 | } |
| 762 | } |
Manman Ren | d61d1eb | 2012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 763 | if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) |
Manman Ren | ad28907 | 2012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 764 | SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 765 | MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()). |
| 766 | createBranchWeights(Weights)); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 767 | |
| 768 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n"); |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 769 | return true; |
| 770 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 771 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 772 | // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out |
| 773 | // which value (or set of values) this is. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 774 | ConstantInt *TIV = 0; |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 775 | BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent(); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 776 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 777 | if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) { |
| 778 | if (TIV != 0) |
| 779 | return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block. |
| 780 | TIV = PredCases[i].Value; |
| 781 | } |
| 782 | assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?"); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 783 | |
| 784 | // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's |
| 785 | // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 786 | BasicBlock *TheRealDest = 0; |
| 787 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 788 | if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) { |
| 789 | TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest; |
| 790 | break; |
| 791 | } |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 792 | |
| 793 | // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case. |
| 794 | if (TheRealDest == 0) TheRealDest = ThisDef; |
| 795 | |
| 796 | // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges. |
| 797 | BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest; |
| 798 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(TIBB), e = succ_end(TIBB); SI != e; ++SI) |
| 799 | if (*SI != CheckEdge) |
| 800 | (*SI)->removePredecessor(TIBB); |
| 801 | else |
| 802 | CheckEdge = 0; |
| 803 | |
| 804 | // Insert the new branch. |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 805 | Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 806 | (void) NI; |
| 807 | |
| 808 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator() |
| 809 | << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI << "\n"); |
| 810 | |
| 811 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI); |
| 812 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | 623369a | 2005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 813 | } |
| 814 | |
Dale Johannesen | c81f544 | 2009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 815 | namespace { |
| 816 | /// ConstantIntOrdering - This class implements a stable ordering of constant |
| 817 | /// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for |
| 818 | /// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness. |
| 819 | struct ConstantIntOrdering { |
| 820 | bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const { |
| 821 | return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()); |
| 822 | } |
| 823 | }; |
| 824 | } |
Dale Johannesen | a9537cf | 2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 825 | |
Chris Lattner | 6d4d21e | 2010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 826 | static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(const void *P1, const void *P2) { |
Roman Divacky | 5932429 | 2012-09-05 22:26:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 827 | const ConstantInt *LHS = *(const ConstantInt*const*)P1; |
| 828 | const ConstantInt *RHS = *(const ConstantInt*const*)P2; |
Chris Lattner | ba3c815 | 2010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 829 | if (LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue())) |
| 830 | return 1; |
| 831 | if (LHS->getValue() == RHS->getValue()) |
| 832 | return 0; |
| 833 | return -1; |
Chris Lattner | 6d4d21e | 2010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 834 | } |
| 835 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 836 | static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction* I) { |
| 837 | MDNode* ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof); |
| 838 | if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0)) |
| 839 | if (MDString* MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0))) |
| 840 | return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights"); |
| 841 | |
| 842 | return false; |
| 843 | } |
| 844 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 845 | /// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front |
| 846 | /// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight |
| 847 | /// metadata. |
| 848 | static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI, |
| 849 | SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) { |
| 850 | MDNode* MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof); |
| 851 | assert(MD); |
| 852 | for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) { |
| 853 | ConstantInt* CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i)); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 854 | assert(CI); |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 855 | Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue()); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 856 | } |
| 857 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 858 | // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case, |
| 859 | // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the |
| 860 | // default weight to be the first entry. |
| 861 | if (BranchInst* BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) { |
| 862 | assert(Weights.size() == 2); |
| 863 | ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition()); |
| 864 | if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ) |
| 865 | std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back()); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 866 | } |
| 867 | } |
| 868 | |
| 869 | /// Sees if any of the weights are too big for a uint32_t, and halves all the |
| 870 | /// weights if any are. |
| 871 | static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) { |
| 872 | bool Halve = false; |
| 873 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < Weights.size(); ++i) |
| 874 | if (Weights[i] > UINT_MAX) { |
| 875 | Halve = true; |
| 876 | break; |
| 877 | } |
| 878 | |
| 879 | if (! Halve) |
| 880 | return; |
| 881 | |
| 882 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < Weights.size(); ++i) |
| 883 | Weights[i] /= 2; |
| 884 | } |
| 885 | |
Bill Wendling | 5049fa6 | 2009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 886 | /// FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors - The specified terminator is a value |
| 887 | /// equality comparison instruction (either a switch or a branch on "X == c"). |
| 888 | /// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons |
| 889 | /// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together. |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 890 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI, |
| 891 | IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 892 | BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent(); |
| 893 | Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal |
| 894 | assert(CV && "Not a comparison?"); |
| 895 | bool Changed = false; |
| 896 | |
Chris Lattner | 8244243 | 2008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 897 | SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB)); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 898 | while (!Preds.empty()) { |
Dan Gohman | e9d87f4 | 2009-05-06 17:22:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 899 | BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val(); |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 900 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 901 | // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value. |
| 902 | TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator(); |
| 903 | Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal |
| 904 | |
| 905 | if (PCV == CV && SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI)) { |
| 906 | // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 907 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases; |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 908 | BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases); |
| 909 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 910 | std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases; |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 911 | BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases); |
| 912 | |
| 913 | // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in |
| 914 | // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to |
| 915 | // build. |
Chris Lattner | 8244243 | 2008-02-18 07:42:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 916 | SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> NewSuccessors; |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 917 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 918 | // Update the branch weight metadata along the way |
| 919 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 920 | bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI); |
| 921 | bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI); |
| 922 | |
Manman Ren | 796d945 | 2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 923 | if (PredHasWeights) { |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 924 | GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights); |
Andrew Trick | c2aa003 | 2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 925 | // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here. |
Manman Ren | 796d945 | 2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 926 | if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size()) |
| 927 | PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false; |
| 928 | } else if (SuccHasWeights) |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 929 | // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights, |
| 930 | // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of |
| 931 | // successor's weights |
| 932 | Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 933 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 934 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights; |
Manman Ren | 796d945 | 2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 935 | if (SuccHasWeights) { |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 936 | GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights); |
Andrew Trick | c2aa003 | 2012-11-15 18:40:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 937 | // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here. |
Manman Ren | 796d945 | 2012-09-14 19:05:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 938 | if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size()) |
| 939 | PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false; |
| 940 | } else if (PredHasWeights) |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 941 | SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 942 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 943 | if (PredDefault == BB) { |
| 944 | // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI |
| 945 | // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 946 | std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled; |
| 947 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 948 | if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB) |
| 949 | PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value); |
| 950 | else { |
| 951 | // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets. |
| 952 | std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back()); |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 953 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 954 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) { |
| 955 | // Increase weight for the default case. |
| 956 | Weights[0] += Weights[i+1]; |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 957 | std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back()); |
| 958 | Weights.pop_back(); |
| 959 | } |
| 960 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 961 | PredCases.pop_back(); |
| 962 | --i; --e; |
| 963 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 964 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 965 | // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building. |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 966 | if (PredDefault != BBDefault) { |
| 967 | PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred); |
| 968 | PredDefault = BBDefault; |
| 969 | NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault); |
| 970 | } |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 971 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 972 | unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size(); |
| 973 | uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0; |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 974 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 975 | if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) && |
| 976 | BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) { |
| 977 | PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]); |
| 978 | NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest); |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 979 | if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) { |
| 980 | // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case |
| 981 | // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by |
| 982 | // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]). |
| 983 | Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i+1]); |
| 984 | ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i+1]; |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 985 | } |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 986 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 987 | |
Manman Ren | 020aba0 | 2012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 988 | if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) { |
| 989 | ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0]; |
| 990 | // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight. |
| 991 | for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i) |
| 992 | Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight; |
| 993 | // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]). |
| 994 | Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0]; |
| 995 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 996 | } else { |
| 997 | // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges |
| 998 | // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be |
| 999 | // activated. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1000 | std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled; |
Manman Ren | a8a2b99 | 2012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1001 | std::map<ConstantInt*, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled; |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1002 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1003 | if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) { |
| 1004 | PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value); |
Manman Ren | a8a2b99 | 2012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1005 | |
| 1006 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) { |
| 1007 | WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i+1]; |
| 1008 | std::swap(Weights[i+1], Weights.back()); |
| 1009 | Weights.pop_back(); |
| 1010 | } |
| 1011 | |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1012 | std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back()); |
| 1013 | PredCases.pop_back(); |
| 1014 | --i; --e; |
| 1015 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1016 | |
| 1017 | // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the |
| 1018 | // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now. |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1019 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1020 | if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) { |
| 1021 | // If this is one we are capable of getting... |
Manman Ren | a8a2b99 | 2012-09-14 17:29:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1022 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) |
| 1023 | Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1024 | PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]); |
| 1025 | NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest); |
| 1026 | PTIHandled.erase(BBCases[i].Value);// This constant is taken care of |
| 1027 | } |
| 1028 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1029 | // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle, |
| 1030 | // they must go to the default destination of TI. |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1031 | for (std::set<ConstantInt*, ConstantIntOrdering>::iterator I = |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1032 | PTIHandled.begin(), |
| 1033 | E = PTIHandled.end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Andrew Trick | df523d4 | 2012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1034 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) |
| 1035 | Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[*I]); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1036 | PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(*I, BBDefault)); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1037 | NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1038 | } |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1039 | } |
| 1040 | |
| 1041 | // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make |
| 1042 | // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these |
| 1043 | // successors. |
| 1044 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSuccessors.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1045 | AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessors[i], Pred, BB); |
| 1046 | |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1047 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1048 | // Convert pointer to int before we switch. |
Duncan Sands | 1df9859 | 2010-02-16 11:11:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1049 | if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) { |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1050 | assert(TD && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout"); |
Chandler Carruth | ece6c6b | 2012-11-01 08:07:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1051 | CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, TD->getIntPtrType(CV->getContext()), |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1052 | "magicptr"); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1053 | } |
| 1054 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1055 | // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction. |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1056 | SwitchInst *NewSI = Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, |
| 1057 | PredCases.size()); |
Devang Patel | d80e8ed | 2011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1058 | NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc()); |
Eric Christopher | c723eb1 | 2012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1059 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1060 | NewSI->addCase(PredCases[i].Value, PredCases[i].Dest); |
Chris Lattner | 13b2f76 | 2005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1061 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1062 | if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) { |
| 1063 | // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t |
| 1064 | FitWeights(Weights); |
| 1065 | |
| 1066 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end()); |
| 1067 | |
| 1068 | NewSI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 1069 | MDBuilder(BB->getContext()). |
| 1070 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 1071 | } |
| 1072 | |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1073 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI); |
Chris Lattner | 13b2f76 | 2005-01-01 16:02:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1074 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1075 | // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must |
| 1076 | // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block |
| 1077 | // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code. |
| 1078 | BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = 0; |
| 1079 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1080 | if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) { |
| 1081 | if (InfLoopBlock == 0) { |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1082 | // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code, |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1083 | // or it won't matter if it's hot. :) |
Owen Anderson | 1d0be15 | 2009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1084 | InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), |
| 1085 | "infloop", BB->getParent()); |
Gabor Greif | 051a950 | 2008-04-06 20:25:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1086 | BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock); |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1087 | } |
| 1088 | NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock); |
| 1089 | } |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1090 | |
Chris Lattner | 542f149 | 2004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1091 | Changed = true; |
| 1092 | } |
| 1093 | } |
| 1094 | return Changed; |
| 1095 | } |
| 1096 | |
Dale Johannesen | c1f1040 | 2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1097 | // isSafeToHoistInvoke - If we would need to insert a select that uses the |
| 1098 | // value of this invoke (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we |
| 1099 | // would need to do this), we can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere |
| 1100 | // to put the select in this case. |
| 1101 | static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2, |
| 1102 | Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) { |
| 1103 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) { |
| 1104 | PHINode *PN; |
| 1105 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin(); |
| 1106 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) { |
| 1107 | Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1); |
| 1108 | Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2); |
| 1109 | if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V==I1 || BB2V==I2)) { |
| 1110 | return false; |
| 1111 | } |
| 1112 | } |
| 1113 | } |
| 1114 | return true; |
| 1115 | } |
| 1116 | |
Chris Lattner | 6306d07 | 2005-08-03 17:59:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1117 | /// HoistThenElseCodeToIf - Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1118 | /// BB2, hoist any common code in the two blocks up into the branch block. The |
| 1119 | /// caller of this function guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2. |
Rafael Espindola | 216dde9 | 2011-05-19 02:26:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1120 | static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI) { |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1121 | // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical |
| 1122 | // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into |
| 1123 | // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As |
| 1124 | // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an |
| 1125 | // identical order. |
| 1126 | BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination. |
| 1127 | BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination |
| 1128 | |
Devang Patel | 65085cf | 2009-02-04 00:03:08 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1129 | BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin(); |
| 1130 | BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin(); |
| 1131 | |
| 1132 | Instruction *I1 = BB1_Itr++, *I2 = BB2_Itr++; |
Devang Patel | 949666e | 2011-04-07 17:27:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1133 | // Skip debug info if it is not identical. |
| 1134 | DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1); |
| 1135 | DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2); |
| 1136 | if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) { |
| 1137 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1)) |
| 1138 | I1 = BB1_Itr++; |
| 1139 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) |
| 1140 | I2 = BB2_Itr++; |
| 1141 | } |
Devang Patel | ae6c95b | 2011-04-07 00:30:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1142 | if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) || |
Dale Johannesen | c1f1040 | 2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1143 | (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))) |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1144 | return false; |
| 1145 | |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1146 | BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent(); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1147 | |
David Majnemer | 3931bdb | 2013-06-03 20:43:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1148 | bool Changed = false; |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1149 | do { |
| 1150 | // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a |
| 1151 | // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI. |
| 1152 | if (isa<TerminatorInst>(I1)) |
| 1153 | goto HoistTerminator; |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1154 | |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1155 | // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch, |
| 1156 | // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove |
| 1157 | // the now redundant second instruction. |
| 1158 | BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI, BB1->getInstList(), I1); |
| 1159 | if (!I2->use_empty()) |
| 1160 | I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1); |
Dan Gohman | 58cfa3b | 2009-08-25 22:11:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1161 | I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2); |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1162 | I2->eraseFromParent(); |
David Majnemer | 3931bdb | 2013-06-03 20:43:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1163 | Changed = true; |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1164 | |
Devang Patel | 65085cf | 2009-02-04 00:03:08 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1165 | I1 = BB1_Itr++; |
Devang Patel | 65085cf | 2009-02-04 00:03:08 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1166 | I2 = BB2_Itr++; |
Devang Patel | 949666e | 2011-04-07 17:27:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1167 | // Skip debug info if it is not identical. |
| 1168 | DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1); |
| 1169 | DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2); |
| 1170 | if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) { |
| 1171 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1)) |
| 1172 | I1 = BB1_Itr++; |
| 1173 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) |
| 1174 | I2 = BB2_Itr++; |
| 1175 | } |
Devang Patel | ae6c95b | 2011-04-07 00:30:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1176 | } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2)); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1177 | |
| 1178 | return true; |
| 1179 | |
| 1180 | HoistTerminator: |
Dale Johannesen | c1f1040 | 2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1181 | // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke. |
| 1182 | if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)) |
David Majnemer | 3931bdb | 2013-06-03 20:43:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1183 | return Changed; |
| 1184 | |
| 1185 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) { |
| 1186 | PHINode *PN; |
| 1187 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin(); |
| 1188 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) { |
| 1189 | Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1); |
| 1190 | Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2); |
| 1191 | if (BB1V == BB2V) |
| 1192 | continue; |
| 1193 | |
| 1194 | if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V)) |
| 1195 | return Changed; |
| 1196 | if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V)) |
| 1197 | return Changed; |
| 1198 | } |
| 1199 | } |
Dale Johannesen | c1f1040 | 2009-06-15 20:59:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1200 | |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1201 | // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator. |
Nick Lewycky | 6776064 | 2009-09-27 07:38:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1202 | Instruction *NT = I1->clone(); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1203 | BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI, NT); |
Benjamin Kramer | f012705 | 2010-01-05 13:12:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1204 | if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) { |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1205 | I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT); |
| 1206 | I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT); |
Chris Lattner | 86cc423 | 2007-02-11 01:37:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1207 | NT->takeName(I1); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1208 | } |
| 1209 | |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1210 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(NT); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1211 | // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing. |
| 1212 | // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in |
| 1213 | // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI |
| 1214 | // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result. |
| 1215 | std::map<std::pair<Value*,Value*>, SelectInst*> InsertedSelects; |
| 1216 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) { |
| 1217 | PHINode *PN; |
| 1218 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->begin(); |
Chris Lattner | 0f535c6 | 2004-11-30 07:47:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1219 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)); ++BBI) { |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1220 | Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1); |
| 1221 | Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1222 | if (BB1V == BB2V) continue; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1223 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1224 | // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT |
| 1225 | // that determines the right value. |
| 1226 | SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)]; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1227 | if (SI == 0) |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1228 | SI = cast<SelectInst> |
| 1229 | (Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V, |
| 1230 | BB1V->getName()+"."+BB2V->getName())); |
| 1231 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1232 | // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2 |
| 1233 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1234 | if (PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN->getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2) |
| 1235 | PN->setIncomingValue(i, SI); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1236 | } |
| 1237 | } |
| 1238 | |
| 1239 | // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors. |
| 1240 | for (succ_iterator SI = succ_begin(BB1), E = succ_end(BB1); SI != E; ++SI) |
| 1241 | AddPredecessorToBlock(*SI, BIParent, BB1); |
Misha Brukman | fd93908 | 2005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1242 | |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1243 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
Chris Lattner | 37dc938 | 2004-11-30 00:29:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1244 | return true; |
| 1245 | } |
| 1246 | |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1247 | /// SinkThenElseCodeToEnd - Given an unconditional branch that goes to BBEnd, |
| 1248 | /// check whether BBEnd has only two predecessors and the other predecessor |
| 1249 | /// ends with an unconditional branch. If it is true, sink any common code |
| 1250 | /// in the two predecessors to BBEnd. |
| 1251 | static bool SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BranchInst *BI1) { |
| 1252 | assert(BI1->isUnconditional()); |
| 1253 | BasicBlock *BB1 = BI1->getParent(); |
| 1254 | BasicBlock *BBEnd = BI1->getSuccessor(0); |
| 1255 | |
| 1256 | // Check that BBEnd has two predecessors and the other predecessor ends with |
| 1257 | // an unconditional branch. |
Benjamin Kramer | fdb9606 | 2012-09-30 21:03:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1258 | pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BBEnd), PE = pred_end(BBEnd); |
| 1259 | BasicBlock *Pred0 = *PI++; |
| 1260 | if (PI == PE) // Only one predecessor. |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1261 | return false; |
Benjamin Kramer | fdb9606 | 2012-09-30 21:03:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1262 | BasicBlock *Pred1 = *PI++; |
| 1263 | if (PI != PE) // More than two predecessors. |
| 1264 | return false; |
| 1265 | BasicBlock *BB2 = (Pred0 == BB1) ? Pred1 : Pred0; |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1266 | BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB2->getTerminator()); |
| 1267 | if (!BI2 || !BI2->isUnconditional()) |
| 1268 | return false; |
| 1269 | |
| 1270 | // Gather the PHI nodes in BBEnd. |
| 1271 | std::map<Value*, std::pair<Value*, PHINode*> > MapValueFromBB1ToBB2; |
| 1272 | Instruction *FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = 0; |
| 1273 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BBEnd->begin(), E = BBEnd->end(); |
| 1274 | I != E; ++I) { |
| 1275 | if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I)) { |
| 1276 | Value *BB1V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1); |
Andrew Trick | df523d4 | 2012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1277 | Value *BB2V = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2); |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1278 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[BB1V] = std::make_pair(BB2V, PN); |
| 1279 | } else { |
| 1280 | FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = &*I; |
| 1281 | break; |
| 1282 | } |
| 1283 | } |
| 1284 | if (!FirstNonPhiInBBEnd) |
| 1285 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | df523d4 | 2012-11-15 18:40:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1286 | |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1287 | |
| 1288 | // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical |
| 1289 | // instructions in the two blocks. We scan backward for obviously identical |
| 1290 | // instructions in an identical order. |
| 1291 | BasicBlock::InstListType::reverse_iterator RI1 = BB1->getInstList().rbegin(), |
| 1292 | RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(), RI2 = BB2->getInstList().rbegin(), |
| 1293 | RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend(); |
| 1294 | // Skip debug info. |
| 1295 | while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1; |
| 1296 | if (RI1 == RE1) |
| 1297 | return false; |
| 1298 | while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2; |
| 1299 | if (RI2 == RE2) |
| 1300 | return false; |
| 1301 | // Skip the unconditional branches. |
| 1302 | ++RI1; |
| 1303 | ++RI2; |
| 1304 | |
| 1305 | bool Changed = false; |
| 1306 | while (RI1 != RE1 && RI2 != RE2) { |
| 1307 | // Skip debug info. |
| 1308 | while (RI1 != RE1 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI1)) ++RI1; |
| 1309 | if (RI1 == RE1) |
| 1310 | return Changed; |
| 1311 | while (RI2 != RE2 && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(&*RI2)) ++RI2; |
| 1312 | if (RI2 == RE2) |
| 1313 | return Changed; |
| 1314 | |
| 1315 | Instruction *I1 = &*RI1, *I2 = &*RI2; |
| 1316 | // I1 and I2 should have a single use in the same PHI node, and they |
| 1317 | // perform the same operation. |
| 1318 | // Cannot move control-flow-involving, volatile loads, vaarg, etc. |
| 1319 | if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || isa<PHINode>(I2) || |
| 1320 | isa<TerminatorInst>(I1) || isa<TerminatorInst>(I2) || |
| 1321 | isa<LandingPadInst>(I1) || isa<LandingPadInst>(I2) || |
| 1322 | isa<AllocaInst>(I1) || isa<AllocaInst>(I2) || |
| 1323 | I1->mayHaveSideEffects() || I2->mayHaveSideEffects() || |
| 1324 | I1->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || I2->mayReadOrWriteMemory() || |
| 1325 | !I1->hasOneUse() || !I2->hasOneUse() || |
| 1326 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1) == MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() || |
| 1327 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].first != I2) |
| 1328 | return Changed; |
| 1329 | |
| 1330 | // Check whether we should swap the operands of ICmpInst. |
| 1331 | ICmpInst *ICmp1 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I1), *ICmp2 = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I2); |
| 1332 | bool SwapOpnds = false; |
| 1333 | if (ICmp1 && ICmp2 && |
| 1334 | ICmp1->getOperand(0) != ICmp2->getOperand(0) && |
| 1335 | ICmp1->getOperand(1) != ICmp2->getOperand(1) && |
| 1336 | (ICmp1->getOperand(0) == ICmp2->getOperand(1) || |
| 1337 | ICmp1->getOperand(1) == ICmp2->getOperand(0))) { |
| 1338 | ICmp2->swapOperands(); |
| 1339 | SwapOpnds = true; |
| 1340 | } |
| 1341 | if (!I1->isSameOperationAs(I2)) { |
| 1342 | if (SwapOpnds) |
| 1343 | ICmp2->swapOperands(); |
| 1344 | return Changed; |
| 1345 | } |
| 1346 | |
| 1347 | // The operands should be either the same or they need to be generated |
| 1348 | // with a PHI node after sinking. We only handle the case where there is |
| 1349 | // a single pair of different operands. |
| 1350 | Value *DifferentOp1 = 0, *DifferentOp2 = 0; |
| 1351 | unsigned Op1Idx = 0; |
| 1352 | for (unsigned I = 0, E = I1->getNumOperands(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 1353 | if (I1->getOperand(I) == I2->getOperand(I)) |
| 1354 | continue; |
| 1355 | // Early exit if we have more-than one pair of different operands or |
| 1356 | // the different operand is already in MapValueFromBB1ToBB2. |
| 1357 | // Early exit if we need a PHI node to replace a constant. |
| 1358 | if (DifferentOp1 || |
| 1359 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.find(I1->getOperand(I)) != |
| 1360 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.end() || |
| 1361 | isa<Constant>(I1->getOperand(I)) || |
| 1362 | isa<Constant>(I2->getOperand(I))) { |
| 1363 | // If we can't sink the instructions, undo the swapping. |
| 1364 | if (SwapOpnds) |
| 1365 | ICmp2->swapOperands(); |
| 1366 | return Changed; |
| 1367 | } |
| 1368 | DifferentOp1 = I1->getOperand(I); |
| 1369 | Op1Idx = I; |
| 1370 | DifferentOp2 = I2->getOperand(I); |
| 1371 | } |
| 1372 | |
| 1373 | // We insert the pair of different operands to MapValueFromBB1ToBB2 and |
| 1374 | // remove (I1, I2) from MapValueFromBB1ToBB2. |
| 1375 | if (DifferentOp1) { |
| 1376 | PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(DifferentOp1->getType(), 2, |
| 1377 | DifferentOp1->getName() + ".sink", |
| 1378 | BBEnd->begin()); |
| 1379 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[DifferentOp1] = std::make_pair(DifferentOp2, NewPN); |
| 1380 | // I1 should use NewPN instead of DifferentOp1. |
| 1381 | I1->setOperand(Op1Idx, NewPN); |
| 1382 | NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp1, BB1); |
| 1383 | NewPN->addIncoming(DifferentOp2, BB2); |
| 1384 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Create PHI node " << *NewPN << "\n";); |
| 1385 | } |
| 1386 | PHINode *OldPN = MapValueFromBB1ToBB2[I1].second; |
| 1387 | MapValueFromBB1ToBB2.erase(I1); |
| 1388 | |
| 1389 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK common instructions " << *I1 << "\n";); |
| 1390 | DEBUG(dbgs() << " " << *I2 << "\n";); |
| 1391 | // We need to update RE1 and RE2 if we are going to sink the first |
| 1392 | // instruction in the basic block down. |
| 1393 | bool UpdateRE1 = (I1 == BB1->begin()), UpdateRE2 = (I2 == BB2->begin()); |
| 1394 | // Sink the instruction. |
| 1395 | BBEnd->getInstList().splice(FirstNonPhiInBBEnd, BB1->getInstList(), I1); |
| 1396 | if (!OldPN->use_empty()) |
| 1397 | OldPN->replaceAllUsesWith(I1); |
| 1398 | OldPN->eraseFromParent(); |
| 1399 | |
| 1400 | if (!I2->use_empty()) |
| 1401 | I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1); |
| 1402 | I1->intersectOptionalDataWith(I2); |
| 1403 | I2->eraseFromParent(); |
| 1404 | |
| 1405 | if (UpdateRE1) |
| 1406 | RE1 = BB1->getInstList().rend(); |
| 1407 | if (UpdateRE2) |
| 1408 | RE2 = BB2->getInstList().rend(); |
| 1409 | FirstNonPhiInBBEnd = I1; |
| 1410 | NumSinkCommons++; |
| 1411 | Changed = true; |
| 1412 | } |
| 1413 | return Changed; |
| 1414 | } |
| 1415 | |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1416 | /// \brief Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a |
| 1417 | /// conditional block. |
| 1418 | /// |
| 1419 | /// We are looking for code like the following: |
| 1420 | /// BrBB: |
| 1421 | /// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2 |
| 1422 | /// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory |
| 1423 | /// ... // function). |
| 1424 | /// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y |
| 1425 | /// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB |
| 1426 | /// ThenBB: |
| 1427 | /// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2 |
| 1428 | /// br label EndBB |
| 1429 | /// EndBB: |
| 1430 | /// ... |
| 1431 | /// We are going to transform this into: |
| 1432 | /// BrBB: |
| 1433 | /// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2 |
| 1434 | /// ... // |
| 1435 | /// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y |
| 1436 | /// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5 |
| 1437 | /// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2 |
| 1438 | /// ... |
| 1439 | /// |
| 1440 | /// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be |
| 1441 | /// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise. |
Benjamin Kramer | 603100d | 2013-05-23 16:09:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1442 | static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB, |
| 1443 | BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) { |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1444 | StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I); |
| 1445 | if (!StoreToHoist) |
| 1446 | return 0; |
| 1447 | |
| 1448 | // Volatile or atomic. |
| 1449 | if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple()) |
| 1450 | return 0; |
| 1451 | |
| 1452 | Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand(); |
| 1453 | |
| 1454 | // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB. |
| 1455 | unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 10; |
| 1456 | for (BasicBlock::reverse_iterator RI = BrBB->rbegin(), |
| 1457 | RE = BrBB->rend(); RI != RE && (--MaxNumInstToLookAt); ++RI) { |
| 1458 | Instruction *CurI = &*RI; |
| 1459 | |
| 1460 | // Could be calling an instruction that effects memory like free(). |
| 1461 | if (CurI->mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI)) |
| 1462 | return 0; |
| 1463 | |
| 1464 | StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI); |
| 1465 | // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location. |
| 1466 | if (SI && SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr) |
| 1467 | // Found the previous store, return its value operand. |
| 1468 | return SI->getValueOperand(); |
| 1469 | else if (SI) |
| 1470 | return 0; // Unknown store. |
| 1471 | } |
| 1472 | |
| 1473 | return 0; |
| 1474 | } |
| 1475 | |
Chandler Carruth | c61bc7a | 2013-01-24 08:05:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1476 | /// \brief Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG. |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1477 | /// |
Chandler Carruth | c61bc7a | 2013-01-24 08:05:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1478 | /// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating |
| 1479 | /// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI |
| 1480 | /// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints. |
| 1481 | /// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of |
| 1482 | /// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction. |
| 1483 | /// |
| 1484 | /// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level: |
| 1485 | /// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in |
| 1486 | /// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and |
| 1487 | /// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs. |
| 1488 | /// |
| 1489 | /// |
| 1490 | /// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR: |
| 1491 | /// \code |
| 1492 | /// BB: |
| 1493 | /// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y |
| 1494 | /// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB |
| 1495 | /// ThenBB: |
| 1496 | /// %sub = sub %x, %y |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1497 | /// br label BB2 |
Chandler Carruth | c61bc7a | 2013-01-24 08:05:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1498 | /// EndBB: |
| 1499 | /// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ] |
| 1500 | /// ... |
| 1501 | /// \endcode |
| 1502 | /// |
| 1503 | /// Into this IR: |
| 1504 | /// \code |
| 1505 | /// BB: |
| 1506 | /// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y |
| 1507 | /// %sub = sub %x, %y |
| 1508 | /// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub |
| 1509 | /// ... |
| 1510 | /// \endcode |
| 1511 | /// |
| 1512 | /// \returns true if the conditional block is removed. |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1513 | static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB) { |
Chandler Carruth | 9e62095 | 2013-01-24 08:22:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1514 | // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive. |
| 1515 | Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition(); |
| 1516 | if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond)) |
| 1517 | return false; |
| 1518 | |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1519 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
| 1520 | BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0); |
| 1521 | |
| 1522 | // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember |
| 1523 | // to swap the select operands later. |
| 1524 | bool Invert = false; |
| 1525 | if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) { |
| 1526 | assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?"); |
| 1527 | Invert = true; |
| 1528 | } |
| 1529 | assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block"); |
| 1530 | |
Chandler Carruth | baf868b | 2013-01-25 05:40:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1531 | // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when |
| 1532 | // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically: |
| 1533 | // - They are defined in BB, and |
| 1534 | // - They have no side effects, and |
| 1535 | // - All of their uses are in CondBB. |
| 1536 | SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts; |
| 1537 | |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1538 | unsigned SpeculationCost = 0; |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1539 | Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = 0; |
| 1540 | StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = 0; |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1541 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(), |
| 1542 | BBE = llvm::prior(ThenBB->end()); |
Devang Patel | 06b1e67 | 2009-03-06 06:00:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1543 | BBI != BBE; ++BBI) { |
| 1544 | Instruction *I = BBI; |
| 1545 | // Skip debug info. |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1546 | if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) |
| 1547 | continue; |
Devang Patel | 06b1e67 | 2009-03-06 06:00:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1548 | |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1549 | // Only speculatively execution a single instruction (not counting the |
| 1550 | // terminator) for now. |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1551 | ++SpeculationCost; |
| 1552 | if (SpeculationCost > 1) |
Devang Patel | 06b1e67 | 2009-03-06 06:00:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1553 | return false; |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1554 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1555 | // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive. |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1556 | if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) && |
| 1557 | !(HoistCondStores && |
| 1558 | (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(I, BB, ThenBB, |
| 1559 | EndBB)))) |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1560 | return false; |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1561 | if (!SpeculatedStoreValue && |
| 1562 | ComputeSpeculationCost(I) > PHINodeFoldingThreshold) |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1563 | return false; |
| 1564 | |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1565 | // Store the store speculation candidate. |
| 1566 | if (SpeculatedStoreValue) |
| 1567 | SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I); |
| 1568 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1569 | // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1570 | // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1571 | // being sunk into the use block. |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1572 | for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1573 | i != e; ++i) { |
| 1574 | Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i); |
Chandler Carruth | baf868b | 2013-01-25 05:40:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1575 | if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || |
| 1576 | OpI->mayHaveSideEffects()) |
| 1577 | continue; // Not a candidate for sinking. |
| 1578 | |
| 1579 | ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI]; |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1580 | } |
| 1581 | } |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1582 | |
Chandler Carruth | baf868b | 2013-01-25 05:40:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1583 | // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for |
| 1584 | // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing |
| 1585 | // and so iteration order isn't significant. |
| 1586 | for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator I = |
| 1587 | SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(), E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end(); |
| 1588 | I != E; ++I) |
| 1589 | if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) { |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1590 | ++SpeculationCost; |
| 1591 | if (SpeculationCost > 1) |
Chandler Carruth | baf868b | 2013-01-25 05:40:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1592 | return false; |
| 1593 | } |
| 1594 | |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1595 | // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects. |
| 1596 | bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false; |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1597 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin(); |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1598 | PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) { |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1599 | Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB); |
| 1600 | Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB); |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1601 | |
Rafael Espindola | babae05 | 2013-06-04 14:11:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1602 | // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf. |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1603 | // Skip PHIs which are trivial. |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1604 | if (ThenV == OrigV) |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1605 | continue; |
| 1606 | |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1607 | HaveRewritablePHIs = true; |
Rafael Espindola | babae05 | 2013-06-04 14:11:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1608 | ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV); |
| 1609 | ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV); |
| 1610 | if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE) |
Chandler Carruth | 681add7 | 2013-01-24 11:53:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1611 | continue; // Known safe and cheap. |
| 1612 | |
Rafael Espindola | babae05 | 2013-06-04 14:11:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1613 | if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) || |
| 1614 | (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE))) |
Chandler Carruth | 681add7 | 2013-01-24 11:53:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1615 | return false; |
Rafael Espindola | babae05 | 2013-06-04 14:11:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1616 | unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE) : 0; |
| 1617 | unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE) : 0; |
| 1618 | if (OrigCost + ThenCost > 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold) |
Chandler Carruth | 681add7 | 2013-01-24 11:53:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1619 | return false; |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1620 | |
Chandler Carruth | 47d8f6d | 2013-01-24 12:05:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1621 | // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up |
| 1622 | // getting expanded into Instructions. |
| 1623 | // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1624 | // constant expression. |
| 1625 | ++SpeculationCost; |
| 1626 | if (SpeculationCost > 1) |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1627 | return false; |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1628 | } |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1629 | |
| 1630 | // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence |
| 1631 | // as well. |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1632 | if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue)) |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1633 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1634 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1635 | // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert. |
Chandler Carruth | 6cf7a91 | 2013-01-24 09:59:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1636 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";); |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1637 | |
Arnold Schwaighofer | 8228ffe | 2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1638 | // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store. |
| 1639 | if (SpeculatedStoreValue) { |
| 1640 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI); |
| 1641 | Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand(); |
| 1642 | Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue; |
| 1643 | if (Invert) |
| 1644 | std::swap(TrueV, FalseV); |
| 1645 | Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, TrueV->getName() + |
| 1646 | "." + FalseV->getName()); |
| 1647 | SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S); |
| 1648 | } |
| 1649 | |
Chandler Carruth | 2c107a8 | 2013-01-24 11:52:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1650 | // Hoist the instructions. |
| 1651 | BB->getInstList().splice(BI, ThenBB->getInstList(), ThenBB->begin(), |
| 1652 | llvm::prior(ThenBB->end())); |
Evan Cheng | 502a4f5 | 2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1653 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1654 | // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands. |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1655 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(BI); |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1656 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = EndBB->begin(); |
| 1657 | PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I); ++I) { |
| 1658 | unsigned OrigI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB); |
| 1659 | unsigned ThenI = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB); |
| 1660 | Value *OrigV = PN->getIncomingValue(OrigI); |
| 1661 | Value *ThenV = PN->getIncomingValue(ThenI); |
| 1662 | |
| 1663 | // Skip PHIs which are trivial. |
| 1664 | if (OrigV == ThenV) |
| 1665 | continue; |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1666 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1667 | // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1668 | // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch |
| 1669 | // destinations were inverted. |
| 1670 | Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV; |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1671 | if (Invert) |
Chandler Carruth | 0afa331 | 2013-01-24 10:40:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1672 | std::swap(TrueV, FalseV); |
| 1673 | Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, |
| 1674 | TrueV->getName() + "." + FalseV->getName()); |
| 1675 | PN->setIncomingValue(OrigI, V); |
| 1676 | PN->setIncomingValue(ThenI, V); |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1677 | } |
| 1678 | |
Evan Cheng | 502a4f5 | 2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1679 | ++NumSpeculations; |
Evan Cheng | 4d09efd | 2008-06-07 08:52:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1680 | return true; |
| 1681 | } |
| 1682 | |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1683 | /// BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough - Return true if we can thread a branch |
| 1684 | /// across this block. |
| 1685 | static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) { |
| 1686 | BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); |
Chris Lattner | e9487f0 | 2005-09-20 01:48:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1687 | unsigned Size = 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1688 | |
Devang Patel | 9200c89 | 2009-03-10 18:00:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1689 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) { |
Dale Johannesen | 8483e54 | 2009-03-12 23:18:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1690 | if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) |
| 1691 | continue; |
Chris Lattner | e9487f0 | 2005-09-20 01:48:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1692 | if (Size > 10) return false; // Don't clone large BB's. |
Dale Johannesen | 8483e54 | 2009-03-12 23:18:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1693 | ++Size; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1694 | |
Dale Johannesen | 8483e54 | 2009-03-12 23:18:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1695 | // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are |
Chris Lattner | e9487f0 | 2005-09-20 01:48:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1696 | // live outside of the current basic block. |
| 1697 | for (Value::use_iterator UI = BBI->use_begin(), E = BBI->use_end(); |
| 1698 | UI != E; ++UI) { |
| 1699 | Instruction *U = cast<Instruction>(*UI); |
| 1700 | if (U->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(U)) return false; |
| 1701 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1702 | |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1703 | // Looks ok, continue checking. |
| 1704 | } |
Chris Lattner | e9487f0 | 2005-09-20 01:48:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1705 | |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1706 | return true; |
| 1707 | } |
| 1708 | |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1709 | /// FoldCondBranchOnPHI - If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value |
| 1710 | /// that is defined in the same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are |
| 1711 | /// constants, thread edges corresponding to that entry to be branches to their |
| 1712 | /// ultimate destination. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1713 | static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *TD) { |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1714 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
| 1715 | PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()); |
Chris Lattner | 9c88d98 | 2005-09-19 23:57:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1716 | // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used |
| 1717 | // outside of the block. |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1718 | if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse()) |
| 1719 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1720 | |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1721 | // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI. |
| 1722 | if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) { |
Chris Lattner | 29874e0 | 2008-12-03 19:44:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1723 | FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1724 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1725 | } |
| 1726 | |
| 1727 | // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs. |
Chris Lattner | 2e42e36 | 2005-09-20 00:43:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1728 | if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1729 | |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1730 | // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are |
| 1731 | // constants. |
Zhou Sheng | 6b6b6ef | 2007-01-11 12:24:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1732 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) { |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1733 | ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i)); |
| 1734 | if (CB == 0 || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)) continue; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1735 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1736 | // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to |
| 1737 | // branch to RealDest. |
| 1738 | BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i); |
| 1739 | BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1740 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1741 | if (RealDest == BB) continue; // Skip self loops. |
Bill Wendling | 6a648b8 | 2011-06-04 09:42:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1742 | // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch. |
| 1743 | if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator())) continue; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1744 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1745 | // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other |
| 1746 | // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new |
| 1747 | // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting |
| 1748 | // the edge we are about to create. |
| 1749 | BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), |
| 1750 | RealDest->getName()+".critedge", |
| 1751 | RealDest->getParent(), RealDest); |
| 1752 | BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1753 | |
Chris Lattner | 6de0a28 | 2010-12-14 07:09:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1754 | // Update PHI nodes. |
| 1755 | AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1756 | |
| 1757 | // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these |
| 1758 | // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the |
| 1759 | // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB. |
| 1760 | BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin(); |
| 1761 | DenseMap<Value*, Value*> TranslateMap; // Track translated values. |
| 1762 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) { |
| 1763 | if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) { |
| 1764 | TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB); |
| 1765 | continue; |
| 1766 | } |
| 1767 | // Clone the instruction. |
| 1768 | Instruction *N = BBI->clone(); |
| 1769 | if (BBI->hasName()) N->setName(BBI->getName()+".c"); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1770 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1771 | // Update operands due to translation. |
| 1772 | for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); |
| 1773 | i != e; ++i) { |
| 1774 | DenseMap<Value*, Value*>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i); |
| 1775 | if (PI != TranslateMap.end()) |
| 1776 | *i = PI->second; |
| 1777 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1778 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1779 | // Check for trivial simplification. |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1780 | if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, TD)) { |
| 1781 | TranslateMap[BBI] = V; |
| 1782 | delete N; // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1783 | } else { |
| 1784 | // Insert the new instruction into its new home. |
| 1785 | EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N); |
| 1786 | if (!BBI->use_empty()) |
| 1787 | TranslateMap[BBI] = N; |
| 1788 | } |
| 1789 | } |
| 1790 | |
| 1791 | // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch |
| 1792 | // to EdgeBB instead. |
| 1793 | TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator(); |
| 1794 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i) |
| 1795 | if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) { |
| 1796 | BB->removePredecessor(PredBB); |
| 1797 | PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB); |
| 1798 | } |
Bill Wendling | 6a648b8 | 2011-06-04 09:42:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1799 | |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1800 | // Recurse, simplifying any other constants. |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1801 | return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, TD) | true; |
Zhou Sheng | 6b6b6ef | 2007-01-11 12:24:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1802 | } |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1803 | |
| 1804 | return false; |
| 1805 | } |
| 1806 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1807 | /// FoldTwoEntryPHINode - Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry |
| 1808 | /// PHI node, see if we can eliminate it. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1809 | static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const DataLayout *TD) { |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1810 | // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if |
| 1811 | // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we |
| 1812 | // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which |
| 1813 | // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control |
| 1814 | // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up |
| 1815 | // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway. |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1816 | BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent(); |
| 1817 | BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse; |
| 1818 | Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse); |
Chris Lattner | 60d410d | 2010-12-14 08:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1819 | if (!IfCond || |
| 1820 | // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially. |
| 1821 | isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond)) |
| 1822 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1823 | |
Chris Lattner | 822a879 | 2006-11-18 19:19:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1824 | // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select. |
| 1825 | // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block. |
| 1826 | // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target |
| 1827 | // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or |
| 1828 | // fewer PHI nodes in this block. |
| 1829 | unsigned NumPhis = 0; |
| 1830 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I) |
| 1831 | if (NumPhis > 2) |
| 1832 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1833 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1834 | // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select |
| 1835 | // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions |
| 1836 | // that need to be moved to the dominating block. |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1837 | SmallPtrSet<Instruction*, 4> AggressiveInsts; |
Peter Collingbourne | 57808b3 | 2011-04-29 18:47:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1838 | unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold, |
| 1839 | MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1840 | |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1841 | for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) { |
| 1842 | PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++); |
Chris Lattner | 07ff353 | 2010-12-14 07:20:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1843 | if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, TD)) { |
| 1844 | PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V); |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1845 | PN->eraseFromParent(); |
Chris Lattner | 07ff353 | 2010-12-14 07:20:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1846 | continue; |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1847 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1848 | |
Peter Collingbourne | f15907f | 2011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1849 | if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts, |
| 1850 | MaxCostVal0) || |
| 1851 | !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts, |
| 1852 | MaxCostVal1)) |
Chris Lattner | 07ff353 | 2010-12-14 07:20:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1853 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1854 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1855 | |
Sylvestre Ledru | c8e41c5 | 2012-07-23 08:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1856 | // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1857 | // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all. |
| 1858 | PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()); |
| 1859 | if (PN == 0) return true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1860 | |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1861 | // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can |
| 1862 | // often be turned into switches and other things. |
| 1863 | if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) && |
| 1864 | (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) || |
| 1865 | isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) || |
| 1866 | isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond))) |
| 1867 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1868 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1869 | // If we all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all |
| 1870 | // instructions in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If |
| 1871 | // not, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so it's not |
| 1872 | // worth promoting to select instructions. |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1873 | BasicBlock *DomBlock = 0; |
| 1874 | BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0); |
| 1875 | BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1); |
| 1876 | if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) { |
| 1877 | IfBlock1 = 0; |
| 1878 | } else { |
| 1879 | DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1); |
| 1880 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I) |
Devang Patel | 383d7ed | 2009-02-03 22:12:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1881 | if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) { |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1882 | // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote. |
| 1883 | // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control |
| 1884 | // flow, so the xform is not worth it. |
| 1885 | return false; |
| 1886 | } |
| 1887 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1888 | |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1889 | if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) { |
| 1890 | IfBlock2 = 0; |
| 1891 | } else { |
| 1892 | DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2); |
| 1893 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin();!isa<TerminatorInst>(I);++I) |
Devang Patel | 383d7ed | 2009-02-03 22:12:02 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1894 | if (!AggressiveInsts.count(I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) { |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1895 | // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote. |
| 1896 | // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control |
| 1897 | // flow, so the xform is not worth it. |
| 1898 | return false; |
| 1899 | } |
| 1900 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1901 | |
Chris Lattner | e0b18e5 | 2010-12-14 07:23:10 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1902 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond << " T: " |
Chris Lattner | 44da7ca | 2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1903 | << IfTrue->getName() << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n"); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1904 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1905 | // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests, |
| 1906 | // do all of the PHI's now. |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1907 | Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator(); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1908 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1909 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1910 | // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the |
| 1911 | // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block. |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1912 | if (IfBlock1) |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1913 | DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt, |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1914 | IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(), |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1915 | IfBlock1->getTerminator()); |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1916 | if (IfBlock2) |
Chris Lattner | 3aff13b | 2010-12-14 08:46:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1917 | DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt, |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1918 | IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(), |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1919 | IfBlock2->getTerminator()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1920 | |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1921 | while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) { |
| 1922 | // Change the PHI node into a select instruction. |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1923 | Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse); |
| 1924 | Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1925 | |
| 1926 | SelectInst *NV = |
Devang Patel | f60364d | 2011-05-18 18:16:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1927 | cast<SelectInst>(Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "")); |
Chris Lattner | 86cc423 | 2007-02-11 01:37:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1928 | PN->replaceAllUsesWith(NV); |
| 1929 | NV->takeName(PN); |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1930 | PN->eraseFromParent(); |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1931 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1932 | |
Chris Lattner | 60d410d | 2010-12-14 08:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1933 | // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement |
| 1934 | // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to |
| 1935 | // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond. |
| 1936 | TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator(); |
Devang Patel | f60364d | 2011-05-18 18:16:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1937 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI); |
| 1938 | Builder.CreateBr(BB); |
Chris Lattner | 60d410d | 2010-12-14 08:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1939 | OldTI->eraseFromParent(); |
Chris Lattner | f58c1a5 | 2005-09-23 06:39:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1940 | return true; |
| 1941 | } |
Chris Lattner | eaba3a1 | 2005-09-19 23:49:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1942 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1943 | /// SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns - If we found a conditional branch that goes |
| 1944 | /// to two returning blocks, try to merge them together into one return, |
| 1945 | /// introducing a select if the return values disagree. |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1946 | static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI, |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1947 | IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1948 | assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch"); |
| 1949 | BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0); |
| 1950 | BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1); |
| 1951 | ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator()); |
| 1952 | ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1953 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1954 | // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty |
| 1955 | // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra |
| 1956 | // computation on one path or the other. |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1957 | if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) |
Devang Patel | 2cc86a1 | 2009-02-05 00:30:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1958 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | 9a2b72a | 2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1959 | if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) |
Devang Patel | 2cc86a1 | 2009-02-05 00:30:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1960 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1961 | |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1962 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI); |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1963 | // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If |
| 1964 | // there is no return value for this function, just change the |
| 1965 | // branch into a return. |
| 1966 | if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) { |
| 1967 | TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent()); |
| 1968 | FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent()); |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1969 | Builder.CreateRetVoid(); |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1970 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1971 | return true; |
| 1972 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1973 | |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1974 | // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are |
| 1975 | // so we can insert a new select instruction. |
| 1976 | Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue(); |
| 1977 | Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1978 | |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1979 | // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks. |
| 1980 | if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue)) |
| 1981 | if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc) |
| 1982 | TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent()); |
| 1983 | if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue)) |
| 1984 | if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc) |
| 1985 | FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1986 | |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1987 | // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to |
| 1988 | // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is |
| 1989 | // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping |
| 1990 | // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being |
| 1991 | // safe. |
| 1992 | if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue)) |
| 1993 | if (TCV->canTrap()) |
| 1994 | return false; |
| 1995 | if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue)) |
| 1996 | if (FCV->canTrap()) |
| 1997 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1998 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 1999 | // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and |
| 2000 | // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG. |
| 2001 | TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent()); |
| 2002 | FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2003 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2004 | // Insert select instructions where needed. |
| 2005 | Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition(); |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2006 | if (TrueValue) { |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2007 | // Insert a select if the results differ. |
Dan Gohman | fc74abf | 2008-07-23 00:34:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2008 | if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) { |
| 2009 | } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) { |
| 2010 | TrueValue = FalseValue; |
| 2011 | } else { |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2012 | TrueValue = Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, |
| 2013 | FalseValue, "retval"); |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2014 | } |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2015 | } |
| 2016 | |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2017 | Value *RI = !TrueValue ? |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2018 | Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue); |
| 2019 | |
Daniel Dunbar | e317bcc | 2009-08-23 10:29:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2020 | (void) RI; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2021 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2022 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:" |
Chris Lattner | bdff548 | 2009-08-23 04:37:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2023 | << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI |
| 2024 | << "TRUEBLOCK: " << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: "<< *FalseSucc); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2025 | |
Eli Friedman | 080efb8 | 2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2026 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
| 2027 | |
Chris Lattner | c9e495c | 2008-04-24 00:01:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2028 | return true; |
| 2029 | } |
| 2030 | |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2031 | /// ExtractBranchMetadata - Given a conditional BranchInstruction, retrieve the |
| 2032 | /// probabilities of the branch taking each edge. Fills in the two APInt |
| 2033 | /// parameters and return true, or returns false if no or invalid metadata was |
| 2034 | /// found. |
| 2035 | static bool ExtractBranchMetadata(BranchInst *BI, |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2036 | uint64_t &ProbTrue, uint64_t &ProbFalse) { |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2037 | assert(BI->isConditional() && |
| 2038 | "Looking for probabilities on unconditional branch?"); |
| 2039 | MDNode *ProfileData = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof); |
Nick Lewycky | 9196848 | 2011-12-27 18:27:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2040 | if (!ProfileData || ProfileData->getNumOperands() != 3) return false; |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2041 | ConstantInt *CITrue = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(1)); |
| 2042 | ConstantInt *CIFalse = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(ProfileData->getOperand(2)); |
Nick Lewycky | 9196848 | 2011-12-27 18:27:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2043 | if (!CITrue || !CIFalse) return false; |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2044 | ProbTrue = CITrue->getValue().getZExtValue(); |
| 2045 | ProbFalse = CIFalse->getValue().getZExtValue(); |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2046 | return true; |
| 2047 | } |
| 2048 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2049 | /// checkCSEInPredecessor - Return true if the given instruction is available |
| 2050 | /// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed. |
| 2051 | /// |
Benjamin Kramer | 23d3622 | 2012-07-13 13:25:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2052 | static bool checkCSEInPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) { |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2053 | if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst)) |
| 2054 | return false; |
| 2055 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = PB->begin(), E = PB->end(); I != E; I++) { |
| 2056 | Instruction *PBI = &*I; |
| 2057 | // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value. |
| 2058 | if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) { |
| 2059 | Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI); |
| 2060 | Inst->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2061 | return true; |
| 2062 | } |
| 2063 | } |
| 2064 | return false; |
| 2065 | } |
Nick Lewycky | 6c00c6a | 2012-01-25 09:43:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2066 | |
Chris Lattner | c8fbc34 | 2011-04-11 23:24:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2067 | /// FoldBranchToCommonDest - If this basic block is simple enough, and if a |
| 2068 | /// predecessor branches to us and one of our successors, fold the block into |
| 2069 | /// the predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination. |
Dan Gohman | 4b35f83 | 2009-06-27 21:30:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2070 | bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI) { |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2071 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2072 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2073 | Instruction *Cond = 0; |
| 2074 | if (BI->isConditional()) |
| 2075 | Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition()); |
| 2076 | else { |
| 2077 | // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where |
| 2078 | // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's |
| 2079 | // successor. If such pattern exisits, check for CSE between BB and its |
| 2080 | // predecessor. |
| 2081 | if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) |
| 2082 | if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator())) |
| 2083 | if (PBI->isConditional() && |
| 2084 | (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) || |
| 2085 | BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) { |
| 2086 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); |
| 2087 | I != E; ) { |
| 2088 | Instruction *Curr = I++; |
| 2089 | if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) { |
| 2090 | Cond = Curr; |
| 2091 | break; |
| 2092 | } |
| 2093 | // Quit if we can't remove this instruction. |
| 2094 | if (!checkCSEInPredecessor(Curr, PB)) |
| 2095 | return false; |
| 2096 | } |
| 2097 | } |
| 2098 | |
| 2099 | if (Cond == 0) |
| 2100 | return false; |
| 2101 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2102 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2103 | if (Cond == 0 || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) || |
| 2104 | Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse()) |
| 2105 | return false; |
Devang Patel | d418194 | 2011-04-06 22:37:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2106 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2107 | // Only allow this if the condition is a simple instruction that can be |
| 2108 | // executed unconditionally. It must be in the same block as the branch, and |
| 2109 | // must be at the front of the block. |
Devang Patel | d0a203d | 2009-02-04 21:39:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2110 | BasicBlock::iterator FrontIt = BB->front(); |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2111 | |
Devang Patel | d0a203d | 2009-02-04 21:39:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2112 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2113 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(FrontIt)) ++FrontIt; |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2114 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2115 | // Allow a single instruction to be hoisted in addition to the compare |
| 2116 | // that feeds the branch. We later ensure that any values that _it_ uses |
| 2117 | // were also live in the predecessor, so that we don't unnecessarily create |
| 2118 | // register pressure or inhibit out-of-order execution. |
| 2119 | Instruction *BonusInst = 0; |
| 2120 | if (&*FrontIt != Cond && |
Owen Anderson | 2722dfa | 2010-07-15 16:38:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2121 | FrontIt->hasOneUse() && *FrontIt->use_begin() == Cond && |
Dan Gohman | f042660 | 2011-12-14 23:49:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2122 | isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(FrontIt)) { |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2123 | BonusInst = &*FrontIt; |
| 2124 | ++FrontIt; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2125 | |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2126 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 2127 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(FrontIt)) ++FrontIt; |
Devang Patel | 60d490c | 2011-04-07 23:11:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2128 | } |
| 2129 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2130 | // Only a single bonus inst is allowed. |
| 2131 | if (&*FrontIt != Cond) |
| 2132 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2133 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2134 | // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch. |
| 2135 | BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = Cond; ++CondIt; |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2136 | |
Devang Patel | d0a203d | 2009-02-04 21:39:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2137 | // Ingore dbg intrinsics. |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2138 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt)) ++CondIt; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2139 | |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2140 | if (&*CondIt != BI) |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2141 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | 6ff645b | 2009-01-19 23:03:13 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2142 | |
| 2143 | // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that |
| 2144 | // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression. |
| 2145 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0))) |
| 2146 | if (CE->canTrap()) |
| 2147 | return false; |
| 2148 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1))) |
| 2149 | if (CE->canTrap()) |
| 2150 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2151 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2152 | // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops. |
| 2153 | BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0); |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2154 | BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : 0; |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2155 | if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB) |
| 2156 | return false; |
Devang Patel | d418194 | 2011-04-06 22:37:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2157 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2158 | for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) { |
| 2159 | BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI; |
| 2160 | BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2161 | |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2162 | // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in |
| 2163 | // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both |
| 2164 | // blocks. |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2165 | SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs; |
| 2166 | if (PBI == 0 || PBI->isUnconditional() || |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2167 | (BI->isConditional() && |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2168 | !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) || |
| 2169 | (!BI->isConditional() && |
| 2170 | !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs))) |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2171 | continue; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2172 | |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2173 | // Determine if the two branches share a common destination. |
Axel Naumann | 3780ad8 | 2012-09-17 14:20:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2174 | Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd; |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2175 | bool InvertPredCond = false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2176 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2177 | if (BI->isConditional()) { |
| 2178 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) |
| 2179 | Opc = Instruction::Or; |
| 2180 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) |
| 2181 | Opc = Instruction::And; |
| 2182 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) |
| 2183 | Opc = Instruction::And, InvertPredCond = true; |
| 2184 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) |
| 2185 | Opc = Instruction::Or, InvertPredCond = true; |
| 2186 | else |
| 2187 | continue; |
| 2188 | } else { |
| 2189 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest) |
| 2190 | continue; |
| 2191 | } |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2192 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2193 | // Ensure that any values used in the bonus instruction are also used |
| 2194 | // by the terminator of the predecessor. This means that those values |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2195 | // must already have been resolved, so we won't be inhibiting the |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2196 | // out-of-order core by speculating them earlier. |
| 2197 | if (BonusInst) { |
| 2198 | // Collect the values used by the bonus inst |
| 2199 | SmallPtrSet<Value*, 4> UsedValues; |
| 2200 | for (Instruction::op_iterator OI = BonusInst->op_begin(), |
| 2201 | OE = BonusInst->op_end(); OI != OE; ++OI) { |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2202 | Value *V = *OI; |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2203 | if (!isa<Constant>(V)) |
| 2204 | UsedValues.insert(V); |
| 2205 | } |
| 2206 | |
| 2207 | SmallVector<std::pair<Value*, unsigned>, 4> Worklist; |
| 2208 | Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(PBI->getOperand(0), 0)); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2209 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2210 | // Walk up to four levels back up the use-def chain of the predecessor's |
| 2211 | // terminator to see if all those values were used. The choice of four |
| 2212 | // levels is arbitrary, to provide a compile-time-cost bound. |
| 2213 | while (!Worklist.empty()) { |
| 2214 | std::pair<Value*, unsigned> Pair = Worklist.back(); |
| 2215 | Worklist.pop_back(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2216 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2217 | if (Pair.second >= 4) continue; |
| 2218 | UsedValues.erase(Pair.first); |
| 2219 | if (UsedValues.empty()) break; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2220 | |
Chris Lattner | daa02ab | 2010-12-13 07:00:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2221 | if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(Pair.first)) { |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2222 | for (Instruction::op_iterator OI = I->op_begin(), OE = I->op_end(); |
| 2223 | OI != OE; ++OI) |
| 2224 | Worklist.push_back(std::make_pair(OI->get(), Pair.second+1)); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2225 | } |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2226 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2227 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2228 | if (!UsedValues.empty()) return false; |
| 2229 | } |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2230 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2231 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2232 | IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2233 | |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2234 | // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now. |
| 2235 | if (InvertPredCond) { |
Chris Lattner | daa02ab | 2010-12-13 07:00:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2236 | Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2237 | |
Chris Lattner | daa02ab | 2010-12-13 07:00:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2238 | if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) { |
| 2239 | CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond); |
| 2240 | CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate()); |
| 2241 | } else { |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2242 | NewCond = Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2243 | PBI->getCondition()->getName()+".not"); |
Chris Lattner | daa02ab | 2010-12-13 07:00:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2244 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2245 | |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2246 | PBI->setCondition(NewCond); |
Nick Lewycky | c9a1aed | 2011-12-26 20:54:14 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2247 | PBI->swapSuccessors(); |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2248 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2249 | |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2250 | // If we have a bonus inst, clone it into the predecessor block. |
| 2251 | Instruction *NewBonus = 0; |
| 2252 | if (BonusInst) { |
| 2253 | NewBonus = BonusInst->clone(); |
| 2254 | PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, NewBonus); |
| 2255 | NewBonus->takeName(BonusInst); |
| 2256 | BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName()+".old"); |
| 2257 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2258 | |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2259 | // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the |
| 2260 | // two conditions together. |
Nick Lewycky | 6776064 | 2009-09-27 07:38:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2261 | Instruction *New = Cond->clone(); |
Owen Anderson | e84178a | 2010-07-14 19:52:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2262 | if (BonusInst) New->replaceUsesOfWith(BonusInst, NewBonus); |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2263 | PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI, New); |
| 2264 | New->takeName(Cond); |
| 2265 | Cond->setName(New->getName()+".old"); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2266 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2267 | if (BI->isConditional()) { |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2268 | Instruction *NewCond = |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2269 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2270 | New, "or.cond")); |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2271 | PBI->setCondition(NewCond); |
| 2272 | |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2273 | uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight; |
| 2274 | bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight, |
| 2275 | PredFalseWeight); |
| 2276 | bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight, |
| 2277 | SuccFalseWeight); |
| 2278 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights; |
| 2279 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2280 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) { |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2281 | if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) { |
| 2282 | // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest |
| 2283 | // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest |
| 2284 | //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI. |
| 2285 | NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight); |
| 2286 | //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI + |
| 2287 | // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI. |
| 2288 | // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits. |
| 2289 | // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic. |
| 2290 | NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * (SuccFalseWeight + |
| 2291 | SuccTrueWeight) + PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight); |
| 2292 | } |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2293 | AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB); |
| 2294 | PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest); |
| 2295 | } |
| 2296 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) { |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2297 | if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) { |
| 2298 | // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB |
| 2299 | // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest |
| 2300 | //TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI + |
| 2301 | // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI. |
| 2302 | NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * (SuccFalseWeight + |
| 2303 | SuccTrueWeight) + PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight); |
| 2304 | //FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI. |
| 2305 | NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight); |
| 2306 | } |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2307 | AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB); |
| 2308 | PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest); |
| 2309 | } |
Manman Ren | 062986c | 2012-09-15 00:39:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2310 | if (NewWeights.size() == 2) { |
| 2311 | // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t |
| 2312 | FitWeights(NewWeights); |
| 2313 | |
| 2314 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end()); |
| 2315 | PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 2316 | MDBuilder(BI->getContext()). |
| 2317 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 2318 | } else |
| 2319 | PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, NULL); |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2320 | } else { |
| 2321 | // Update PHI nodes in the common successors. |
| 2322 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) { |
Nick Lewycky | edb5842 | 2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2323 | ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>( |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2324 | PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent())); |
| 2325 | assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1)); |
| 2326 | Instruction *MergedCond = 0; |
| 2327 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) { |
| 2328 | // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value) |
| 2329 | // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value) |
| 2330 | // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value |
| 2331 | Instruction *NotCond = |
| 2332 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), |
| 2333 | "not.cond")); |
| 2334 | MergedCond = |
| 2335 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, |
| 2336 | NotCond, New, |
| 2337 | "and.cond")); |
| 2338 | if (PBI_C->isOne()) |
| 2339 | MergedCond = |
| 2340 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or, |
| 2341 | PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, |
| 2342 | "or.cond")); |
| 2343 | } else { |
| 2344 | // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C) |
| 2345 | // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond) |
| 2346 | // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2347 | MergedCond = |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2348 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, |
| 2349 | PBI->getCondition(), New, |
| 2350 | "and.cond")); |
| 2351 | if (PBI_C->isOne()) { |
| 2352 | Instruction *NotCond = |
| 2353 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), |
| 2354 | "not.cond")); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2355 | MergedCond = |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2356 | cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::Or, |
| 2357 | NotCond, MergedCond, |
| 2358 | "or.cond")); |
| 2359 | } |
| 2360 | } |
| 2361 | // Update PHI Node. |
| 2362 | PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()), |
| 2363 | MergedCond); |
| 2364 | } |
| 2365 | // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional. |
| 2366 | BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI); |
| 2367 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI); |
| 2368 | PBI = New_PBI; |
Chris Lattner | 3698909 | 2008-07-13 21:20:19 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2369 | } |
Devang Patel | d418194 | 2011-04-06 22:37:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2370 | |
Nick Lewycky | 06cc66f | 2011-12-27 04:31:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2371 | // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we |
| 2372 | // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's. |
| 2373 | |
Chris Lattner | 3c6e746 | 2011-04-14 02:44:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2374 | // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock. |
| 2375 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(), E = BB->end(); I != E; ++I) |
| 2376 | if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(*I)) |
| 2377 | I->clone()->insertBefore(PBI); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2378 | |
Chris Lattner | 117f8cf | 2010-12-14 05:57:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2379 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | 1347e87 | 2008-07-13 21:12:01 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2380 | } |
| 2381 | return false; |
| 2382 | } |
| 2383 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2384 | /// SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch - If we have a conditional branch as a |
| 2385 | /// predecessor of another block, this function tries to simplify it. We know |
| 2386 | /// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the |
| 2387 | /// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI. |
| 2388 | static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI) { |
| 2389 | assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional()); |
| 2390 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Dan Gohman | 4ae5126 | 2009-08-12 16:23:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2391 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2392 | // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2393 | // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2394 | // this conditional branch redundant. |
| 2395 | if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() && |
| 2396 | PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) { |
| 2397 | // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically |
| 2398 | // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially. |
| 2399 | if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) { |
| 2400 | // Turn this into a branch on constant. |
| 2401 | bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2402 | BI->setCondition(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), |
Owen Anderson | 1d0be15 | 2009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2403 | CondIsTrue)); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2404 | return true; // Nuke the branch on constant. |
| 2405 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2406 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2407 | // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges |
| 2408 | // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of |
| 2409 | // simplifycfg will thread the block. |
| 2410 | if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) { |
Jay Foad | d8b4fb4 | 2011-03-30 11:19:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2411 | pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); |
Owen Anderson | 1d0be15 | 2009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2412 | PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), |
Jay Foad | 3ecfc86 | 2011-03-30 11:28:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2413 | std::distance(PB, PE), |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2414 | BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", |
| 2415 | BB->begin()); |
Chris Lattner | eb388af | 2008-07-13 21:55:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2416 | // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only |
| 2417 | // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds. |
| 2418 | // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic. |
Jay Foad | d8b4fb4 | 2011-03-30 11:19:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2419 | for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) { |
Gabor Greif | 6253983 | 2010-07-12 10:59:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2420 | BasicBlock *P = *PI; |
| 2421 | if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2422 | PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional() && |
| 2423 | PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() && |
| 2424 | PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) { |
| 2425 | bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2426 | NewPN->addIncoming(ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), |
Gabor Greif | 6253983 | 2010-07-12 10:59:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2427 | CondIsTrue), P); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2428 | } else { |
Gabor Greif | 6253983 | 2010-07-12 10:59:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2429 | NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2430 | } |
Gabor Greif | 6253983 | 2010-07-12 10:59:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2431 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2432 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2433 | BI->setCondition(NewPN); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2434 | return true; |
| 2435 | } |
| 2436 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2437 | |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2438 | // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any |
| 2439 | // predecessors is a conditional branch to one of our destinations, |
| 2440 | // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br. |
Zhou Sheng | a8d57fe | 2009-02-26 06:56:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2441 | BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); |
| 2442 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 2443 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) |
| 2444 | ++BBI; |
| 2445 | if (&*BBI != BI) |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2446 | return false; |
Chris Lattner | 63bf29b | 2009-01-20 01:15:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2447 | |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2448 | |
Chris Lattner | 63bf29b | 2009-01-20 01:15:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2449 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition())) |
| 2450 | if (CE->canTrap()) |
| 2451 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2452 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2453 | int PBIOp, BIOp; |
| 2454 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) |
| 2455 | PBIOp = BIOp = 0; |
| 2456 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) |
| 2457 | PBIOp = 0, BIOp = 1; |
| 2458 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) |
| 2459 | PBIOp = 1, BIOp = 0; |
| 2460 | else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) |
| 2461 | PBIOp = BIOp = 1; |
| 2462 | else |
| 2463 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2464 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2465 | // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch |
| 2466 | // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will |
| 2467 | // keep getting unwound. |
| 2468 | if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB) |
| 2469 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2470 | |
| 2471 | // Do not perform this transformation if it would require |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2472 | // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets |
| 2473 | // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization. |
| 2474 | BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2475 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2476 | unsigned NumPhis = 0; |
| 2477 | for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); |
| 2478 | isa<PHINode>(II); ++II, ++NumPhis) |
| 2479 | if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform. |
| 2480 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2481 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2482 | // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops. |
| 2483 | BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2484 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2485 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent() |
Chris Lattner | bdff548 | 2009-08-23 04:37:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2486 | << "AND: " << *BI->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2487 | |
| 2488 | |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2489 | // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional |
| 2490 | // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other |
| 2491 | // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop |
| 2492 | // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up |
| 2493 | // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is |
| 2494 | // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously |
| 2495 | // infinite loop with no cond branch. |
| 2496 | if (OtherDest == BB) { |
| 2497 | // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code, |
| 2498 | // or it won't matter if it's hot. :) |
Owen Anderson | 1d0be15 | 2009-08-13 21:58:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2499 | BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), |
| 2500 | "infloop", BB->getParent()); |
Chris Lattner | 093a438 | 2008-07-13 22:23:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2501 | BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock); |
| 2502 | OtherDest = InfLoopBlock; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2503 | } |
| 2504 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2505 | DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent()); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2506 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2507 | // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave |
| 2508 | // it alone, but modify PBI. |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2509 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2510 | // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions. |
| 2511 | Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition(); |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2512 | IRBuilder<true, NoFolder> Builder(PBI); |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2513 | if (PBIOp) |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2514 | PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName()+".not"); |
| 2515 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2516 | Value *BICond = BI->getCondition(); |
| 2517 | if (BIOp) |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2518 | BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName()+".not"); |
| 2519 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2520 | // Merge the conditions. |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2521 | Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge"); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2522 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2523 | // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests. |
| 2524 | PBI->setCondition(Cond); |
| 2525 | PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest); |
| 2526 | PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2527 | |
Manman Ren | 5665403 | 2012-09-17 21:30:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2528 | // Update branch weight for PBI. |
| 2529 | uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight; |
| 2530 | bool PredHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(PBI, PredTrueWeight, |
| 2531 | PredFalseWeight); |
| 2532 | bool SuccHasWeights = ExtractBranchMetadata(BI, SuccTrueWeight, |
| 2533 | SuccFalseWeight); |
| 2534 | if (PredHasWeights && SuccHasWeights) { |
| 2535 | uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight; |
| 2536 | uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ?PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight; |
| 2537 | uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight; |
| 2538 | uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight; |
| 2539 | // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal + |
| 2540 | // PredOther * SuccCommon. |
| 2541 | // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther. |
| 2542 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 2> NewWeights; |
| 2543 | NewWeights.push_back(PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) + |
| 2544 | PredOther * SuccCommon); |
| 2545 | NewWeights.push_back(PredOther * SuccOther); |
| 2546 | // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t |
| 2547 | FitWeights(NewWeights); |
| 2548 | |
| 2549 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 2> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),NewWeights.end()); |
| 2550 | PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 2551 | MDBuilder(BI->getContext()). |
| 2552 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 2553 | } |
| 2554 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2555 | // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's |
| 2556 | // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block. |
Chris Lattner | 6de0a28 | 2010-12-14 07:09:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2557 | AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2558 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2559 | // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to |
| 2560 | // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different |
| 2561 | // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make |
| 2562 | // them agree. |
Chris Lattner | 6de0a28 | 2010-12-14 07:09:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2563 | PHINode *PN; |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2564 | for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); |
| 2565 | (PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(II)); ++II) { |
| 2566 | Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB); |
| 2567 | unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()); |
| 2568 | Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx); |
| 2569 | if (BIV != PBIV) { |
| 2570 | // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value. |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2571 | Value *NV = cast<SelectInst> |
| 2572 | (Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName()+".mux")); |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2573 | PN->setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV); |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2574 | } |
| 2575 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2576 | |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2577 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent()); |
| 2578 | DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2579 | |
Chris Lattner | b824512 | 2008-07-13 22:04:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2580 | // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least |
| 2581 | // one fewer predecessor. |
| 2582 | return true; |
Chris Lattner | 867661a | 2008-07-13 21:53:26 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2583 | } |
| 2584 | |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2585 | // SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect - Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a |
| 2586 | // branch to TrueBB if Cond is true or to FalseBB if Cond is false. |
| 2587 | // Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator. |
| 2588 | // Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to |
| 2589 | // non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable. |
| 2590 | static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond, |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2591 | BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB, |
| 2592 | uint32_t TrueWeight, |
| 2593 | uint32_t FalseWeight){ |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2594 | // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG. |
| 2595 | // First, figure out which successors to preserve. |
| 2596 | // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that |
| 2597 | // successor. |
| 2598 | BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB; |
| 2599 | BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : 0; |
| 2600 | |
| 2601 | // Then remove the rest. |
| 2602 | for (unsigned I = 0, E = OldTerm->getNumSuccessors(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 2603 | BasicBlock *Succ = OldTerm->getSuccessor(I); |
| 2604 | // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge. |
| 2605 | if (Succ == KeepEdge1) |
| 2606 | KeepEdge1 = 0; |
| 2607 | else if (Succ == KeepEdge2) |
| 2608 | KeepEdge2 = 0; |
| 2609 | else |
| 2610 | Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent()); |
| 2611 | } |
| 2612 | |
Devang Patel | d3372b8 | 2011-05-18 18:43:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2613 | IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm); |
| 2614 | Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc()); |
| 2615 | |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2616 | // Insert an appropriate new terminator. |
| 2617 | if ((KeepEdge1 == 0) && (KeepEdge2 == 0)) { |
| 2618 | if (TrueBB == FalseBB) |
| 2619 | // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present. |
| 2620 | // Create an unconditional branch to it. |
Devang Patel | d3372b8 | 2011-05-18 18:43:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2621 | Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB); |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2622 | else { |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2623 | // We found both of the successors we were looking for. |
| 2624 | // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select. |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2625 | BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB); |
| 2626 | if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight) |
| 2627 | NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 2628 | MDBuilder(OldTerm->getContext()). |
| 2629 | createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight)); |
| 2630 | } |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2631 | } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) { |
| 2632 | // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this |
| 2633 | // terminator must be unreachable. |
| 2634 | new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm); |
| 2635 | } else { |
| 2636 | // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't. |
| 2637 | // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found; |
| 2638 | // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable. |
| 2639 | if (KeepEdge1 == 0) |
| 2640 | // Only TrueBB was found. |
Devang Patel | d3372b8 | 2011-05-18 18:43:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2641 | Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB); |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2642 | else |
| 2643 | // Only FalseBB was found. |
Devang Patel | d3372b8 | 2011-05-18 18:43:31 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2644 | Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB); |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2645 | } |
| 2646 | |
| 2647 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm); |
| 2648 | return true; |
| 2649 | } |
| 2650 | |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2651 | // SimplifySwitchOnSelect - Replaces |
| 2652 | // (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y |
| 2653 | // with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs, |
| 2654 | // unconditional otherwise. |
| 2655 | static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) { |
| 2656 | // Check for constant integer values in the select. |
| 2657 | ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue()); |
| 2658 | ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue()); |
| 2659 | if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal) |
| 2660 | return false; |
| 2661 | |
| 2662 | // Find the relevant condition and destinations. |
| 2663 | Value *Condition = Select->getCondition(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2664 | BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal).getCaseSuccessor(); |
| 2665 | BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal).getCaseSuccessor(); |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2666 | |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2667 | // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB. |
| 2668 | uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0; |
| 2669 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
| 2670 | bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI); |
| 2671 | if (HasWeights) { |
| 2672 | GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights); |
| 2673 | if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) { |
| 2674 | TrueWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal). |
| 2675 | getSuccessorIndex()]; |
| 2676 | FalseWeight = (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal). |
| 2677 | getSuccessorIndex()]; |
| 2678 | } |
| 2679 | } |
| 2680 | |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2681 | // Perform the actual simplification. |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2682 | return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, |
| 2683 | TrueWeight, FalseWeight); |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2684 | } |
| 2685 | |
Frits van Bommel | 7ac40c3 | 2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2686 | // SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect - Replaces |
| 2687 | // (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA), |
| 2688 | // blockaddress(@fn, BlockB))) |
| 2689 | // with |
| 2690 | // (br cond, BlockA, BlockB). |
| 2691 | static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) { |
| 2692 | // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses. |
| 2693 | BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue()); |
| 2694 | BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue()); |
| 2695 | if (!TBA || !FBA) |
| 2696 | return false; |
| 2697 | |
| 2698 | // Extract the actual blocks. |
| 2699 | BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock(); |
| 2700 | BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock(); |
| 2701 | |
Frits van Bommel | 65fdded | 2011-01-11 12:52:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2702 | // Perform the actual simplification. |
Manman Ren | b11cbe6 | 2012-09-17 22:28:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2703 | return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, |
| 2704 | 0, 0); |
Frits van Bommel | 7ac40c3 | 2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2705 | } |
| 2706 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2707 | /// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt - This is called when we find an icmp |
| 2708 | /// instruction (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a |
| 2709 | /// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific |
| 2710 | /// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In |
| 2711 | /// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the |
| 2712 | /// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something |
| 2713 | /// like: |
| 2714 | /// |
| 2715 | /// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ] |
| 2716 | /// DEFAULT: |
| 2717 | /// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92 |
| 2718 | /// br label %end |
| 2719 | /// end: |
| 2720 | /// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ] |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2721 | /// |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2722 | /// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to |
| 2723 | /// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2724 | static bool TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt( |
| 2725 | ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, |
| 2726 | const DataLayout *TD) { |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2727 | BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent(); |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2728 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2729 | // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too |
| 2730 | // complex. |
| 2731 | if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse()) return false; |
| 2732 | |
| 2733 | Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0); |
| 2734 | ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1)); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2735 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2736 | // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on |
| 2737 | // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can |
| 2738 | // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things. |
| 2739 | BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor(); |
| 2740 | if (Pred == 0 || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator())) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2741 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2742 | SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()); |
| 2743 | if (SI->getCondition() != V) |
| 2744 | return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2745 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2746 | // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of |
| 2747 | // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction |
| 2748 | // away. |
| 2749 | if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) { |
| 2750 | ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB); |
| 2751 | assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value"); |
| 2752 | ICI->setOperand(0, VVal); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2753 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2754 | if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, TD)) { |
| 2755 | ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2756 | ICI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2757 | } |
| 2758 | // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2759 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2760 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2761 | |
Chris Lattner | abf7067 | 2010-12-13 03:43:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2762 | // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're |
| 2763 | // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI |
| 2764 | // and zap it. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2765 | if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) { |
Chris Lattner | abf7067 | 2010-12-13 03:43:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2766 | Value *V; |
| 2767 | if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ) |
| 2768 | V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext()); |
| 2769 | else |
| 2770 | V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2771 | |
Chris Lattner | abf7067 | 2010-12-13 03:43:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2772 | ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V); |
| 2773 | ICI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2774 | // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2775 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | abf7067 | 2010-12-13 03:43:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2776 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2777 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2778 | // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in |
| 2779 | // the block. |
| 2780 | BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0); |
| 2781 | PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->use_back()); |
| 2782 | if (PHIUse == 0 || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() || |
| 2783 | isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse))) |
| 2784 | return false; |
| 2785 | |
| 2786 | // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets |
| 2787 | // true in the PHI. |
| 2788 | Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext()); |
| 2789 | Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext()); |
| 2790 | |
| 2791 | if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ) |
| 2792 | std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst); |
| 2793 | |
| 2794 | // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or |
| 2795 | // false depending on if it is EQ or NE. |
| 2796 | ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst); |
| 2797 | ICI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2798 | |
| 2799 | // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from |
| 2800 | // the switch to the merge point on the compared value. |
| 2801 | BasicBlock *NewBB = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", |
| 2802 | BB->getParent(), BB); |
Manman Ren | b010277 | 2012-09-17 23:07:43 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2803 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
| 2804 | bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI); |
| 2805 | if (HasWeights) { |
| 2806 | GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights); |
| 2807 | if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) { |
| 2808 | // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst". |
| 2809 | Weights[0] = (Weights[0]+1) >> 1; |
| 2810 | Weights.push_back(Weights[0]); |
| 2811 | |
| 2812 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end()); |
| 2813 | SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 2814 | MDBuilder(SI->getContext()). |
| 2815 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 2816 | } |
| 2817 | } |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2818 | SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2819 | |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2820 | // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry. |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2821 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB); |
| 2822 | Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc()); |
| 2823 | Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock); |
Chris Lattner | 61c7744 | 2010-12-13 03:18:54 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2824 | PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB); |
| 2825 | return true; |
| 2826 | } |
| 2827 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2828 | /// SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain - The specified branch is a conditional branch. |
| 2829 | /// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and |
| 2830 | /// fold it into a switch instruction if so. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2831 | static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout *TD, |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2832 | IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2833 | Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition()); |
| 2834 | if (Cond == 0) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2835 | |
| 2836 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2837 | // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction. |
| 2838 | // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of |
| 2839 | // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them. |
| 2840 | Value *CompVal = 0; |
| 2841 | std::vector<ConstantInt*> Values; |
| 2842 | bool TrueWhenEqual = true; |
| 2843 | Value *ExtraCase = 0; |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2844 | unsigned UsedICmps = 0; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2845 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2846 | if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2847 | CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, TD, true, |
| 2848 | UsedICmps); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2849 | } else if (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::And) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2850 | CompVal = GatherConstantCompares(Cond, Values, ExtraCase, TD, false, |
| 2851 | UsedICmps); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2852 | TrueWhenEqual = false; |
| 2853 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2854 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2855 | // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail. |
| 2856 | if (CompVal == 0) return false; |
| 2857 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2858 | // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch. |
| 2859 | if (UsedICmps <= 1) |
| 2860 | return false; |
| 2861 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2862 | // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch |
| 2863 | // instruction can't handle, remove them now. |
| 2864 | array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate); |
| 2865 | Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2866 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2867 | // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the |
| 2868 | // transformation. A switch with one value is just an cond branch. |
| 2869 | if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2870 | |
Andrew Trick | b1b9783 | 2012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2871 | // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how |
| 2872 | // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it. |
| 2873 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2874 | // Figure out which block is which destination. |
| 2875 | BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1); |
| 2876 | BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0); |
| 2877 | if (!TrueWhenEqual) std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2878 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2879 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2880 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2881 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size() |
Chris Lattner | 117f8cf | 2010-12-14 05:57:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2882 | << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n" << *BB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2883 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2884 | // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch |
| 2885 | // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block |
| 2886 | // right before the condbr to handle it. |
| 2887 | if (ExtraCase) { |
| 2888 | BasicBlock *NewBB = BB->splitBasicBlock(BI, "switch.early.test"); |
| 2889 | // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block. |
| 2890 | TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator(); |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2891 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI); |
| 2892 | |
Chris Lattner | 117f8cf | 2010-12-14 05:57:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2893 | if (TrueWhenEqual) |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2894 | Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB); |
Chris Lattner | 117f8cf | 2010-12-14 05:57:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2895 | else |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2896 | Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2897 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2898 | OldTI->eraseFromParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2899 | |
Chris Lattner | 97bd89e | 2010-12-13 05:34:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2900 | // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them |
| 2901 | // for the edge we just added. |
Chris Lattner | 6de0a28 | 2010-12-14 07:09:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2902 | AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2903 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2904 | DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase |
| 2905 | << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2906 | BB = NewBB; |
| 2907 | } |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2908 | |
| 2909 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2910 | // Convert pointer to int before we switch. |
| 2911 | if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) { |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2912 | assert(TD && "Cannot switch on pointer without DataLayout"); |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2913 | CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CompVal, |
Chandler Carruth | ece6c6b | 2012-11-01 08:07:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2914 | TD->getIntPtrType(CompVal->getContext()), |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2915 | "magicptr"); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2916 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2917 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2918 | // Create the new switch instruction now. |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2919 | SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size()); |
Devang Patel | d80e8ed | 2011-05-17 23:29:05 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2920 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2921 | // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction. |
| 2922 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i) |
| 2923 | New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2924 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2925 | // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any |
| 2926 | // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to |
| 2927 | // the number of edges added. |
| 2928 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); |
| 2929 | isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) { |
| 2930 | PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI); |
| 2931 | Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB); |
| 2932 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size()-1; i != e; ++i) |
| 2933 | PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB); |
| 2934 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2935 | |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2936 | // Erase the old branch instruction. |
| 2937 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2938 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2939 | DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n'); |
Chris Lattner | 97fdb89 | 2010-12-13 05:03:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2940 | return true; |
| 2941 | } |
| 2942 | |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2943 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
| 2944 | // If this is a trivial landing pad that just continues unwinding the caught |
| 2945 | // exception then zap the landing pad, turning its invokes into calls. |
| 2946 | BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent(); |
| 2947 | LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI()); |
| 2948 | if (RI->getValue() != LPInst) |
| 2949 | // Not a landing pad, or the resume is not unwinding the exception that |
| 2950 | // caused control to branch here. |
| 2951 | return false; |
| 2952 | |
| 2953 | // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics. |
| 2954 | BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst, E = RI; |
| 2955 | while (++I != E) |
| 2956 | if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) |
| 2957 | return false; |
| 2958 | |
| 2959 | // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block. |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2960 | bool InvokeRequiresTableEntry = false; |
| 2961 | bool Changed = false; |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2962 | for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) { |
| 2963 | InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>((*PI++)->getTerminator()); |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2964 | |
| 2965 | if (II->hasFnAttr(Attribute::UWTable)) { |
| 2966 | // Don't remove an `invoke' instruction if the ABI requires an entry into |
| 2967 | // the table. |
| 2968 | InvokeRequiresTableEntry = true; |
| 2969 | continue; |
| 2970 | } |
| 2971 | |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2972 | SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end() - 3); |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2973 | |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2974 | // Insert a call instruction before the invoke. |
| 2975 | CallInst *Call = CallInst::Create(II->getCalledValue(), Args, "", II); |
| 2976 | Call->takeName(II); |
| 2977 | Call->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv()); |
| 2978 | Call->setAttributes(II->getAttributes()); |
| 2979 | Call->setDebugLoc(II->getDebugLoc()); |
| 2980 | |
| 2981 | // Anything that used the value produced by the invoke instruction now uses |
| 2982 | // the value produced by the call instruction. Note that we do this even |
| 2983 | // for void functions and calls with no uses so that the callgraph edge is |
| 2984 | // updated. |
| 2985 | II->replaceAllUsesWith(Call); |
| 2986 | BB->removePredecessor(II->getParent()); |
| 2987 | |
| 2988 | // Insert a branch to the normal destination right before the invoke. |
| 2989 | BranchInst::Create(II->getNormalDest(), II); |
| 2990 | |
| 2991 | // Finally, delete the invoke instruction! |
| 2992 | II->eraseFromParent(); |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2993 | Changed = true; |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2994 | } |
| 2995 | |
Bill Wendling | d5bb208 | 2013-03-11 20:53:00 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 2996 | if (!InvokeRequiresTableEntry) |
| 2997 | // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it. |
| 2998 | BB->eraseFromParent(); |
| 2999 | |
| 3000 | return Changed; |
Duncan Sands | ad99ef8 | 2011-09-05 12:57:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3001 | } |
| 3002 | |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3003 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3004 | BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent(); |
| 3005 | if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator()) return false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3006 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3007 | // Find predecessors that end with branches. |
| 3008 | SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> UncondBranchPreds; |
| 3009 | SmallVector<BranchInst*, 8> CondBranchPreds; |
| 3010 | for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) { |
| 3011 | BasicBlock *P = *PI; |
| 3012 | TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator(); |
| 3013 | if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) { |
| 3014 | if (BI->isUnconditional()) |
| 3015 | UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P); |
| 3016 | else |
| 3017 | CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI); |
| 3018 | } |
| 3019 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3020 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3021 | // If we found some, do the transformation! |
Evan Cheng | c3f507f | 2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3022 | if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3023 | while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) { |
| 3024 | BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val(); |
| 3025 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB |
| 3026 | << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred); |
Evan Cheng | c3f507f | 2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3027 | (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3028 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3029 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3030 | // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now. |
| 3031 | if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB)) |
| 3032 | // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block. |
| 3033 | BB->eraseFromParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3034 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3035 | return true; |
| 3036 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3037 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3038 | // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return |
| 3039 | // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the |
| 3040 | // branch itself into a select/return pair. |
| 3041 | while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) { |
| 3042 | BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3043 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3044 | // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block. |
| 3045 | if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) && |
| 3046 | isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) && |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3047 | SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder)) |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3048 | return true; |
| 3049 | } |
| 3050 | return false; |
| 3051 | } |
| 3052 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3053 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) { |
| 3054 | BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3055 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3056 | bool Changed = false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3057 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3058 | // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can |
| 3059 | // be removed, do so. |
| 3060 | while (UI != BB->begin()) { |
| 3061 | BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI; |
| 3062 | --BBI; |
Eli Friedman | 8176388 | 2011-08-15 23:59:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3063 | // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause |
| 3064 | // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile |
| 3065 | // operations may have this effect. |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3066 | if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) break; |
Eli Friedman | 8176388 | 2011-08-15 23:59:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3067 | |
| 3068 | if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) { |
| 3069 | if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) { |
| 3070 | if (SI->isVolatile()) |
| 3071 | break; |
| 3072 | } else if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) { |
| 3073 | if (LI->isVolatile()) |
| 3074 | break; |
| 3075 | } else if (AtomicRMWInst *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) { |
| 3076 | if (RMWI->isVolatile()) |
| 3077 | break; |
| 3078 | } else if (AtomicCmpXchgInst *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) { |
| 3079 | if (CXI->isVolatile()) |
| 3080 | break; |
| 3081 | } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) && |
| 3082 | !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3083 | break; |
Eli Friedman | 8176388 | 2011-08-15 23:59:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3084 | } |
Bill Wendling | 23b49ba | 2011-08-16 20:41:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3085 | // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it |
| 3086 | // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad, |
| 3087 | // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes, |
| 3088 | // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased. |
Eli Friedman | 8176388 | 2011-08-15 23:59:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3089 | } |
| 3090 | |
Eli Friedman | 2adc5b6 | 2011-03-09 00:48:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3091 | // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead) |
| 3092 | if (!BBI->use_empty()) |
| 3093 | BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType())); |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3094 | BBI->eraseFromParent(); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3095 | Changed = true; |
| 3096 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3097 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3098 | // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander |
| 3099 | // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them. |
| 3100 | if (&BB->front() != UI) return Changed; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3101 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3102 | SmallVector<BasicBlock*, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB)); |
| 3103 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) { |
| 3104 | TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator(); |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3105 | IRBuilder<> Builder(TI); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3106 | if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) { |
| 3107 | if (BI->isUnconditional()) { |
| 3108 | if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) { |
| 3109 | new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI); |
| 3110 | TI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 3111 | Changed = true; |
| 3112 | } |
| 3113 | } else { |
| 3114 | if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) { |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3115 | Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1)); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3116 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
| 3117 | } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) { |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3118 | Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0)); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3119 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI); |
| 3120 | Changed = true; |
| 3121 | } |
| 3122 | } |
| 3123 | } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3124 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3125 | i != e; ++i) |
| 3126 | if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == BB) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3127 | BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent()); |
| 3128 | SI->removeCase(i); |
| 3129 | --i; --e; |
| 3130 | Changed = true; |
| 3131 | } |
| 3132 | // If the default value is unreachable, figure out the most popular |
| 3133 | // destination and make it the default. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3134 | if (SI->getDefaultDest() == BB) { |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3135 | std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> > Popularity; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3136 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3137 | i != e; ++i) { |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3138 | std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> &entry = |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3139 | Popularity[i.getCaseSuccessor()]; |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3140 | if (entry.first == 0) { |
| 3141 | entry.first = 1; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3142 | entry.second = i.getCaseIndex(); |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3143 | } else { |
| 3144 | entry.first++; |
| 3145 | } |
| 3146 | } |
| 3147 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3148 | // Find the most popular block. |
| 3149 | unsigned MaxPop = 0; |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3150 | unsigned MaxIndex = 0; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3151 | BasicBlock *MaxBlock = 0; |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3152 | for (std::map<BasicBlock*, std::pair<unsigned, unsigned> >::iterator |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3153 | I = Popularity.begin(), E = Popularity.end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3154 | if (I->second.first > MaxPop || |
Eli Friedman | b1a6eab | 2011-03-15 02:23:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3155 | (I->second.first == MaxPop && MaxIndex > I->second.second)) { |
| 3156 | MaxPop = I->second.first; |
| 3157 | MaxIndex = I->second.second; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3158 | MaxBlock = I->first; |
| 3159 | } |
| 3160 | } |
| 3161 | if (MaxBlock) { |
| 3162 | // Make this the new default, allowing us to delete any explicit |
| 3163 | // edges to it. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3164 | SI->setDefaultDest(MaxBlock); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3165 | Changed = true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3166 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3167 | // If MaxBlock has phinodes in it, remove MaxPop-1 entries from |
| 3168 | // it. |
| 3169 | if (isa<PHINode>(MaxBlock->begin())) |
| 3170 | for (unsigned i = 0; i != MaxPop-1; ++i) |
| 3171 | MaxBlock->removePredecessor(SI->getParent()); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3172 | |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3173 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3174 | i != e; ++i) |
| 3175 | if (i.getCaseSuccessor() == MaxBlock) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3176 | SI->removeCase(i); |
| 3177 | --i; --e; |
| 3178 | } |
| 3179 | } |
| 3180 | } |
| 3181 | } else if (InvokeInst *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) { |
| 3182 | if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) { |
| 3183 | // Convert the invoke to a call instruction. This would be a good |
| 3184 | // place to note that the call does not throw though. |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3185 | BranchInst *BI = Builder.CreateBr(II->getNormalDest()); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3186 | II->removeFromParent(); // Take out of symbol table |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3187 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3188 | // Insert the call now... |
| 3189 | SmallVector<Value*, 8> Args(II->op_begin(), II->op_end()-3); |
Devang Patel | 1aa89a2 | 2011-05-19 00:09:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3190 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI); |
| 3191 | CallInst *CI = Builder.CreateCall(II->getCalledValue(), |
Jay Foad | a3efbb1 | 2011-07-15 08:37:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3192 | Args, II->getName()); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3193 | CI->setCallingConv(II->getCallingConv()); |
| 3194 | CI->setAttributes(II->getAttributes()); |
| 3195 | // If the invoke produced a value, the call does now instead. |
| 3196 | II->replaceAllUsesWith(CI); |
| 3197 | delete II; |
| 3198 | Changed = true; |
| 3199 | } |
| 3200 | } |
| 3201 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3202 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3203 | // If this block is now dead, remove it. |
| 3204 | if (pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) && |
| 3205 | BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) { |
| 3206 | // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block. |
| 3207 | BB->eraseFromParent(); |
| 3208 | return true; |
| 3209 | } |
| 3210 | |
| 3211 | return Changed; |
| 3212 | } |
| 3213 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3214 | /// TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp - Turns a switch with that contains only a |
| 3215 | /// integer range comparison into a sub, an icmp and a branch. |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3216 | static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3217 | assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?"); |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3218 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 042b27f | 2011-02-03 22:51:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3219 | // Make sure all cases point to the same destination and gather the values. |
| 3220 | SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> Cases; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3221 | SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3222 | Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue()); |
| 3223 | SwitchInst::CaseIt PrevI = I++; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3224 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); I != E; PrevI = I++) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3225 | if (PrevI.getCaseSuccessor() != I.getCaseSuccessor()) |
Benjamin Kramer | 042b27f | 2011-02-03 22:51:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3226 | return false; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3227 | Cases.push_back(I.getCaseValue()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 042b27f | 2011-02-03 22:51:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3228 | } |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3229 | assert(Cases.size() == SI->getNumCases() && "Not all cases gathered"); |
Benjamin Kramer | 042b27f | 2011-02-03 22:51:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3230 | |
| 3231 | // Sort the case values, then check if they form a range we can transform. |
| 3232 | array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate); |
| 3233 | for (unsigned I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3234 | if (Cases[I-1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue()+1) |
| 3235 | return false; |
| 3236 | } |
| 3237 | |
| 3238 | Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(Cases.back()); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3239 | Constant *NumCases = ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), SI->getNumCases()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3240 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 33828bc | 2011-02-07 22:37:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3241 | Value *Sub = SI->getCondition(); |
| 3242 | if (!Offset->isNullValue()) |
Devang Patel | 1f5812b | 2011-05-19 00:13:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3243 | Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName()+".off"); |
Hans Wennborg | a121e24 | 2013-04-16 08:35:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3244 | Value *Cmp; |
| 3245 | // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor. |
| 3246 | if (NumCases->isNullValue() && SI->getNumCases() != 0) |
| 3247 | Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext()); |
| 3248 | else |
| 3249 | Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch"); |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3250 | BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr( |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3251 | Cmp, SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor(), SI->getDefaultDest()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3252 | |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3253 | // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch. |
| 3254 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
| 3255 | bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI); |
| 3256 | if (HasWeights) { |
| 3257 | GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights); |
| 3258 | if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) { |
| 3259 | // Combine all weights for the cases to be the true weight of NewBI. |
| 3260 | // We assume that the sum of all weights for a Terminator can fit into 32 |
| 3261 | // bits. |
| 3262 | uint32_t NewTrueWeight = 0; |
| 3263 | for (unsigned I = 1, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) |
| 3264 | NewTrueWeight += (uint32_t)Weights[I]; |
| 3265 | NewBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 3266 | MDBuilder(SI->getContext()). |
| 3267 | createBranchWeights(NewTrueWeight, |
| 3268 | (uint32_t)Weights[0])); |
| 3269 | } |
| 3270 | } |
| 3271 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3272 | // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successor's PHI nodes. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3273 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = SI->case_begin().getCaseSuccessor()->begin(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3274 | isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3275 | for (unsigned I = 0, E = SI->getNumCases()-1; I != E; ++I) |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3276 | cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent()); |
| 3277 | } |
| 3278 | SI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 3279 | |
| 3280 | return true; |
| 3281 | } |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3282 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3283 | /// EliminateDeadSwitchCases - Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch |
| 3284 | /// and use it to remove dead cases. |
| 3285 | static bool EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI) { |
| 3286 | Value *Cond = SI->getCondition(); |
| 3287 | unsigned Bits = cast<IntegerType>(Cond->getType())->getBitWidth(); |
| 3288 | APInt KnownZero(Bits, 0), KnownOne(Bits, 0); |
Rafael Espindola | 26c8dcc | 2012-04-04 12:51:34 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3289 | ComputeMaskedBits(Cond, KnownZero, KnownOne); |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3290 | |
| 3291 | // Gather dead cases. |
| 3292 | SmallVector<ConstantInt*, 8> DeadCases; |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3293 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3294 | if ((I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownZero) != 0 || |
| 3295 | (I.getCaseValue()->getValue() & KnownOne) != KnownOne) { |
| 3296 | DeadCases.push_back(I.getCaseValue()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3297 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case '" |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3298 | << I.getCaseValue() << "' is dead.\n"); |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3299 | } |
| 3300 | } |
| 3301 | |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3302 | SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights; |
| 3303 | bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI); |
| 3304 | if (HasWeight) { |
| 3305 | GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights); |
| 3306 | HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()); |
| 3307 | } |
| 3308 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3309 | // Remove dead cases from the switch. |
| 3310 | for (unsigned I = 0, E = DeadCases.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3311 | SwitchInst::CaseIt Case = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCases[I]); |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3312 | assert(Case != SI->case_default() && |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 2447312 | 2012-02-01 07:49:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3313 | "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming."); |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3314 | if (HasWeight) { |
| 3315 | std::swap(Weights[Case.getCaseIndex()+1], Weights.back()); |
| 3316 | Weights.pop_back(); |
| 3317 | } |
| 3318 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3319 | // Prune unused values from PHI nodes. |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3320 | Case.getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent()); |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3321 | SI->removeCase(Case); |
| 3322 | } |
Manman Ren | 222d619 | 2012-09-18 00:47:33 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3323 | if (HasWeight) { |
| 3324 | SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end()); |
| 3325 | SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, |
| 3326 | MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()). |
| 3327 | createBranchWeights(MDWeights)); |
| 3328 | } |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3329 | |
| 3330 | return !DeadCases.empty(); |
| 3331 | } |
| 3332 | |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3333 | /// FindPHIForConditionForwarding - If BB would be eligible for simplification |
| 3334 | /// by TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated |
| 3335 | /// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor |
| 3336 | /// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return |
| 3337 | /// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node. |
| 3338 | static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue, |
| 3339 | BasicBlock *BB, |
| 3340 | int *PhiIndex) { |
| 3341 | if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator()) |
| 3342 | return NULL; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification. |
| 3343 | if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor()) |
| 3344 | return NULL; // BB must be dominated by the switch. |
| 3345 | |
| 3346 | BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator()); |
| 3347 | if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional()) |
| 3348 | return NULL; // Terminator must be unconditional branch. |
| 3349 | |
| 3350 | BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0); |
| 3351 | |
| 3352 | BasicBlock::iterator I = Succ->begin(); |
| 3353 | while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) { |
| 3354 | int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(BB); |
| 3355 | assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?"); |
| 3356 | |
| 3357 | Value *InValue = PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx); |
| 3358 | if (InValue != CaseValue) continue; |
| 3359 | |
| 3360 | *PhiIndex = Idx; |
| 3361 | return PHI; |
| 3362 | } |
| 3363 | |
| 3364 | return NULL; |
| 3365 | } |
| 3366 | |
| 3367 | /// ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI - Try to forward the condition of a switch |
| 3368 | /// instruction to a phi node dominated by the switch, if that would mean that |
| 3369 | /// some of the destination blocks of the switch can be folded away. |
| 3370 | /// Returns true if a change is made. |
| 3371 | static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) { |
| 3372 | typedef DenseMap<PHINode*, SmallVector<int,4> > ForwardingNodesMap; |
| 3373 | ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes; |
| 3374 | |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | 3d3abe0 | 2012-03-11 06:09:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3375 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt I = SI->case_begin(), E = SI->case_end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Stepan Dyatkovskiy | c10fa6c | 2012-03-08 07:06:20 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3376 | ConstantInt *CaseValue = I.getCaseValue(); |
| 3377 | BasicBlock *CaseDest = I.getCaseSuccessor(); |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3378 | |
| 3379 | int PhiIndex; |
| 3380 | PHINode *PHI = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, |
| 3381 | &PhiIndex); |
| 3382 | if (!PHI) continue; |
| 3383 | |
| 3384 | ForwardingNodes[PHI].push_back(PhiIndex); |
| 3385 | } |
| 3386 | |
| 3387 | bool Changed = false; |
| 3388 | |
| 3389 | for (ForwardingNodesMap::iterator I = ForwardingNodes.begin(), |
| 3390 | E = ForwardingNodes.end(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3391 | PHINode *Phi = I->first; |
Craig Topper | a0ec3f9 | 2013-07-14 04:42:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3392 | SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = I->second; |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3393 | |
| 3394 | if (Indexes.size() < 2) continue; |
| 3395 | |
| 3396 | for (size_t I = 0, E = Indexes.size(); I != E; ++I) |
| 3397 | Phi->setIncomingValue(Indexes[I], SI->getCondition()); |
| 3398 | Changed = true; |
| 3399 | } |
| 3400 | |
| 3401 | return Changed; |
| 3402 | } |
| 3403 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3404 | /// ValidLookupTableConstant - Return true if the backend will be able to handle |
| 3405 | /// initializing an array of constants like C. |
Hans Wennborg | bf01582 | 2012-09-07 08:22:57 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3406 | static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C) { |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3407 | if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) |
| 3408 | return CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing(); |
| 3409 | |
| 3410 | return isa<ConstantFP>(C) || |
| 3411 | isa<ConstantInt>(C) || |
| 3412 | isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) || |
| 3413 | isa<GlobalValue>(C) || |
| 3414 | isa<UndefValue>(C); |
| 3415 | } |
| 3416 | |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3417 | /// LookupConstant - If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up |
Hans Wennborg | daf4cfc | 2012-10-31 15:31:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3418 | /// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there. |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3419 | static Constant *LookupConstant(Value *V, |
| 3420 | const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) { |
| 3421 | if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V)) |
| 3422 | return C; |
| 3423 | return ConstantPool.lookup(V); |
| 3424 | } |
| 3425 | |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3426 | /// ConstantFold - Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for |
| 3427 | /// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are |
| 3428 | /// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the |
Hans Wennborg | daf4cfc | 2012-10-31 15:31:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3429 | /// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise. |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3430 | static Constant *ConstantFold(Instruction *I, |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3431 | const SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*>& ConstantPool) { |
| 3432 | if (BinaryOperator *BO = dyn_cast<BinaryOperator>(I)) { |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3433 | Constant *A = LookupConstant(BO->getOperand(0), ConstantPool); |
| 3434 | if (!A) |
| 3435 | return 0; |
| 3436 | Constant *B = LookupConstant(BO->getOperand(1), ConstantPool); |
| 3437 | if (!B) |
| 3438 | return 0; |
| 3439 | return ConstantExpr::get(BO->getOpcode(), A, B); |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3440 | } |
| 3441 | |
| 3442 | if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) { |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3443 | Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(0), ConstantPool); |
| 3444 | if (!A) |
| 3445 | return 0; |
| 3446 | Constant *B = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(1), ConstantPool); |
| 3447 | if (!B) |
| 3448 | return 0; |
| 3449 | return ConstantExpr::getCompare(Cmp->getPredicate(), A, B); |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3450 | } |
| 3451 | |
| 3452 | if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) { |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3453 | Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool); |
| 3454 | if (!A) |
| 3455 | return 0; |
| 3456 | if (A->isAllOnesValue()) |
| 3457 | return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool); |
| 3458 | if (A->isNullValue()) |
| 3459 | return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool); |
Hans Wennborg | daf4cfc | 2012-10-31 15:31:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3460 | return 0; |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3461 | } |
| 3462 | |
| 3463 | if (CastInst *Cast = dyn_cast<CastInst>(I)) { |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3464 | Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(0), ConstantPool); |
| 3465 | if (!A) |
| 3466 | return 0; |
| 3467 | return ConstantExpr::getCast(Cast->getOpcode(), A, Cast->getDestTy()); |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3468 | } |
| 3469 | |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3470 | return 0; |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3471 | } |
| 3472 | |
| 3473 | /// GetCaseResults - Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes |
| 3474 | /// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case |
Hans Wennborg | daf4cfc | 2012-10-31 15:31:09 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3475 | /// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3476 | /// case), of a switch instruction SI. |
Craig Topper | a0ec3f9 | 2013-07-14 04:42:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3477 | static bool |
| 3478 | GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, |
| 3479 | ConstantInt *CaseVal, |
| 3480 | BasicBlock *CaseDest, |
| 3481 | BasicBlock **CommonDest, |
| 3482 | SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode*,Constant*> > &Res) { |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3483 | // The block from which we enter the common destination. |
| 3484 | BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent(); |
| 3485 | |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3486 | // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through |
| 3487 | // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor. |
| 3488 | SmallDenseMap<Value*, Constant*> ConstantPool; |
| 3489 | ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal)); |
| 3490 | for (BasicBlock::iterator I = CaseDest->begin(), E = CaseDest->end(); I != E; |
| 3491 | ++I) { |
| 3492 | if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(I)) { |
| 3493 | // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block. |
| 3494 | if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1) |
| 3495 | return false; |
| 3496 | Pred = CaseDest; |
| 3497 | CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0); |
| 3498 | } else if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) { |
| 3499 | // Skip debug intrinsic. |
| 3500 | continue; |
| 3501 | } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(I, ConstantPool)) { |
| 3502 | // Instruction is side-effect free and constant. |
| 3503 | ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(I, C)); |
| 3504 | } else { |
| 3505 | break; |
| 3506 | } |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3507 | } |
| 3508 | |
| 3509 | // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one. |
| 3510 | if (!*CommonDest) |
| 3511 | *CommonDest = CaseDest; |
| 3512 | // If the destination isn't the common one, abort. |
| 3513 | if (CaseDest != *CommonDest) |
| 3514 | return false; |
| 3515 | |
| 3516 | // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block. |
| 3517 | BasicBlock::iterator I = (*CommonDest)->begin(); |
| 3518 | while (PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(I++)) { |
| 3519 | int Idx = PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(Pred); |
| 3520 | if (Idx == -1) |
| 3521 | continue; |
| 3522 | |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3523 | Constant *ConstVal = LookupConstant(PHI->getIncomingValue(Idx), |
| 3524 | ConstantPool); |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3525 | if (!ConstVal) |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3526 | return false; |
| 3527 | |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3528 | // Note: If the constant comes from constant-propagating the case value |
| 3529 | // through the CaseDest basic block, it will be safe to remove the |
| 3530 | // instructions in that block. They cannot be used (except in the phi nodes |
| 3531 | // we visit) outside CaseDest, because that block does not dominate its |
| 3532 | // successor. If it did, we would not be in this phi node. |
| 3533 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3534 | // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support. |
| 3535 | if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal)) |
| 3536 | return false; |
| 3537 | |
| 3538 | Res.push_back(std::make_pair(PHI, ConstVal)); |
| 3539 | } |
| 3540 | |
| 3541 | return true; |
| 3542 | } |
| 3543 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3544 | namespace { |
| 3545 | /// SwitchLookupTable - This class represents a lookup table that can be used |
| 3546 | /// to replace a switch. |
| 3547 | class SwitchLookupTable { |
| 3548 | public: |
| 3549 | /// SwitchLookupTable - Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement |
| 3550 | /// with the contents of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the |
| 3551 | /// table. |
| 3552 | SwitchLookupTable(Module &M, |
| 3553 | uint64_t TableSize, |
| 3554 | ConstantInt *Offset, |
Craig Topper | a0ec3f9 | 2013-07-14 04:42:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3555 | const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3556 | Constant *DefaultValue, |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3557 | const DataLayout *TD); |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3558 | |
| 3559 | /// BuildLookup - Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at |
| 3560 | /// the position given by Index in the lookup table. |
| 3561 | Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder); |
| 3562 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3563 | /// WouldFitInRegister - Return true if a table with TableSize elements of |
| 3564 | /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register. |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3565 | static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *TD, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3566 | uint64_t TableSize, |
| 3567 | const Type *ElementType); |
| 3568 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3569 | private: |
| 3570 | // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in |
| 3571 | // different ways. |
| 3572 | enum { |
| 3573 | // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to |
| 3574 | // store that single value and return it for each lookup. |
| 3575 | SingleValueKind, |
| 3576 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3577 | // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap |
| 3578 | // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by |
| 3579 | // shift and mask operations. |
| 3580 | BitMapKind, |
| 3581 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3582 | // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load |
| 3583 | // instructions from the table. |
| 3584 | ArrayKind |
| 3585 | } Kind; |
| 3586 | |
| 3587 | // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value. |
| 3588 | Constant *SingleValue; |
| 3589 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3590 | // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap. |
| 3591 | ConstantInt *BitMap; |
| 3592 | IntegerType *BitMapElementTy; |
| 3593 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3594 | // For ArrayKind, this is the array. |
| 3595 | GlobalVariable *Array; |
| 3596 | }; |
| 3597 | } |
| 3598 | |
| 3599 | SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(Module &M, |
| 3600 | uint64_t TableSize, |
| 3601 | ConstantInt *Offset, |
Craig Topper | a0ec3f9 | 2013-07-14 04:42:23 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3602 | const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*> >& Values, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3603 | Constant *DefaultValue, |
Duncan Sands | 7046561 | 2013-01-23 09:09:50 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3604 | const DataLayout *TD) |
| 3605 | : SingleValue(0), BitMap(0), BitMapElementTy(0), Array(0) { |
Hans Wennborg | 565df79 | 2012-09-26 11:07:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3606 | assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!"); |
| 3607 | assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!"); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3608 | |
| 3609 | // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3610 | SingleValue = Values.begin()->second; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3611 | |
| 3612 | // Build up the table contents. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3613 | SmallVector<Constant*, 64> TableContents(TableSize); |
| 3614 | for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3615 | ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first; |
| 3616 | Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second; |
| 3617 | assert(CaseRes->getType() == DefaultValue->getType()); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3618 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3619 | uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()) |
| 3620 | .getLimitedValue(); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3621 | TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes; |
| 3622 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3623 | if (CaseRes != SingleValue) |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3624 | SingleValue = 0; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3625 | } |
| 3626 | |
| 3627 | // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3628 | if (Values.size() < TableSize) { |
| 3629 | for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) { |
| 3630 | if (!TableContents[I]) |
| 3631 | TableContents[I] = DefaultValue; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3632 | } |
| 3633 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3634 | if (DefaultValue != SingleValue) |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3635 | SingleValue = 0; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3636 | } |
| 3637 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3638 | // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store |
| 3639 | // that single value. |
| 3640 | if (SingleValue) { |
| 3641 | Kind = SingleValueKind; |
| 3642 | return; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3643 | } |
| 3644 | |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3645 | // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap. |
| 3646 | if (WouldFitInRegister(TD, TableSize, DefaultValue->getType())) { |
| 3647 | IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(DefaultValue->getType()); |
| 3648 | APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0); |
| 3649 | for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) { |
| 3650 | TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 64f27e7 | 2012-10-01 11:31:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3651 | // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero. |
| 3652 | if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) { |
| 3653 | ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]); |
| 3654 | TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth()); |
| 3655 | } |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3656 | } |
| 3657 | BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt); |
| 3658 | BitMapElementTy = IT; |
| 3659 | Kind = BitMapKind; |
| 3660 | ++NumBitMaps; |
| 3661 | return; |
| 3662 | } |
| 3663 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3664 | // Store the table in an array. |
| 3665 | ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(DefaultValue->getType(), TableSize); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3666 | Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents); |
| 3667 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3668 | Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/ true, |
| 3669 | GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, |
| 3670 | Initializer, |
| 3671 | "switch.table"); |
| 3672 | Array->setUnnamedAddr(true); |
| 3673 | Kind = ArrayKind; |
| 3674 | } |
| 3675 | |
| 3676 | Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
| 3677 | switch (Kind) { |
| 3678 | case SingleValueKind: |
| 3679 | return SingleValue; |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3680 | case BitMapKind: { |
| 3681 | // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59). |
| 3682 | IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType(); |
| 3683 | |
| 3684 | // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap. |
| 3685 | // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so |
| 3686 | // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe. |
Hans Wennborg | 50b7d70 | 2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3687 | Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast"); |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3688 | |
| 3689 | // Multiply the shift amount by the element width. |
| 3690 | ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(ShiftAmt, |
| 3691 | ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()), |
| 3692 | "switch.shiftamt"); |
| 3693 | |
| 3694 | // Shift down. |
| 3695 | Value *DownShifted = Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, |
| 3696 | "switch.downshift"); |
| 3697 | // Mask off. |
| 3698 | return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, |
| 3699 | "switch.masked"); |
| 3700 | } |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3701 | case ArrayKind: { |
| 3702 | Value *GEPIndices[] = { Builder.getInt32(0), Index }; |
| 3703 | Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array, GEPIndices, |
| 3704 | "switch.gep"); |
| 3705 | return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load"); |
| 3706 | } |
| 3707 | } |
| 3708 | llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!"); |
| 3709 | } |
| 3710 | |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3711 | bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout *TD, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3712 | uint64_t TableSize, |
| 3713 | const Type *ElementType) { |
| 3714 | if (!TD) |
| 3715 | return false; |
| 3716 | const IntegerType *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType); |
| 3717 | if (!IT) |
| 3718 | return false; |
| 3719 | // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values |
| 3720 | // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type. |
Benjamin Kramer | 465251a | 2012-09-27 18:29:58 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3721 | |
| 3722 | // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width. |
| 3723 | if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX/IT->getBitWidth()) |
| 3724 | return false; |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3725 | return TD->fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth()); |
| 3726 | } |
| 3727 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3728 | /// ShouldBuildLookupTable - Determine whether a lookup table should be built |
Hans Wennborg | deb2e9c | 2013-06-04 11:22:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3729 | /// for this switch, based on the number of cases, size of the table and the |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3730 | /// types of the results. |
| 3731 | static bool ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3732 | uint64_t TableSize, |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3733 | const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, |
Micah Villmow | 3574eca | 2012-10-08 16:38:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3734 | const DataLayout *TD, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3735 | const SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>& ResultTypes) { |
Hans Wennborg | 565df79 | 2012-09-26 11:07:37 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3736 | if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10) |
| 3737 | return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3738 | |
Chandler Carruth | 06ec721 | 2012-11-30 09:26:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3739 | bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true; |
Evan Cheng | 40eef5f | 2012-11-30 02:02:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3740 | bool HasIllegalType = false; |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3741 | for (SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*>::const_iterator I = ResultTypes.begin(), |
| 3742 | E = ResultTypes.end(); I != E; ++I) { |
Evan Cheng | 40eef5f | 2012-11-30 02:02:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3743 | Type *Ty = I->second; |
Chandler Carruth | 66ea2f9 | 2012-11-30 09:34:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3744 | |
| 3745 | // Saturate this flag to true. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3746 | HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty); |
Chandler Carruth | 66ea2f9 | 2012-11-30 09:34:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3747 | |
| 3748 | // Saturate this flag to false. |
| 3749 | AllTablesFitInRegister = AllTablesFitInRegister && |
| 3750 | SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(TD, TableSize, Ty); |
| 3751 | |
| 3752 | // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with |
| 3753 | // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the |
| 3754 | // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map. |
| 3755 | if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister) |
Evan Cheng | 40eef5f | 2012-11-30 02:02:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3756 | break; |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3757 | } |
Evan Cheng | 40eef5f | 2012-11-30 02:02:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3758 | |
Chandler Carruth | 06ec721 | 2012-11-30 09:26:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3759 | // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway. |
| 3760 | if (AllTablesFitInRegister) |
| 3761 | return true; |
| 3762 | |
| 3763 | // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types. |
| 3764 | if (HasIllegalType) |
| 3765 | return false; |
| 3766 | |
| 3767 | // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for |
| 3768 | // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase. |
| 3769 | // FIXME: Find the best cut-off. |
| 3770 | return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3771 | } |
| 3772 | |
| 3773 | /// SwitchToLookupTable - If the switch is only used to initialize one or more |
| 3774 | /// phi nodes in a common successor block with different constant values, |
| 3775 | /// replace the switch with lookup tables. |
| 3776 | static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3777 | IRBuilder<> &Builder, |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3778 | const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, |
| 3779 | const DataLayout* TD) { |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3780 | assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?"); |
Hans Wennborg | 04d7d13 | 2012-10-30 11:23:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3781 | |
Hans Wennborg | b031996 | 2012-11-07 21:35:12 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3782 | // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it. |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3783 | if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables()) |
Hans Wennborg | 04d7d13 | 2012-10-30 11:23:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3784 | return false; |
| 3785 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3786 | // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could |
| 3787 | // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that. |
| 3788 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3789 | // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each |
| 3790 | // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big |
| 3791 | // string and lookup indices into that. |
| 3792 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3793 | // Ignore the switch if the number of cases is too small. |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3794 | // This is similar to the check when building jump tables in |
| 3795 | // SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase. |
| 3796 | // FIXME: Determine the best cut-off. |
| 3797 | if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) |
| 3798 | return false; |
| 3799 | |
| 3800 | // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the |
| 3801 | // common destination, as well as the the min and max case values. |
| 3802 | assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end()); |
| 3803 | SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin(); |
| 3804 | ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue(); |
| 3805 | ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI.getCaseValue(); |
| 3806 | |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3807 | BasicBlock *CommonDest = 0; |
Hans Wennborg | 2f9fc76 | 2012-09-10 07:44:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3808 | typedef SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt*, Constant*>, 4> ResultListTy; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3809 | SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, ResultListTy> ResultLists; |
| 3810 | SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Constant*> DefaultResults; |
| 3811 | SmallDenseMap<PHINode*, Type*> ResultTypes; |
| 3812 | SmallVector<PHINode*, 4> PHIs; |
| 3813 | |
| 3814 | for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) { |
| 3815 | ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI.getCaseValue(); |
| 3816 | if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue())) |
| 3817 | MinCaseVal = CaseVal; |
| 3818 | if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue())) |
| 3819 | MaxCaseVal = CaseVal; |
| 3820 | |
| 3821 | // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value. |
| 3822 | typedef SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> ResultsTy; |
| 3823 | ResultsTy Results; |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3824 | if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, |
| 3825 | Results)) |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3826 | return false; |
| 3827 | |
| 3828 | // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi. |
| 3829 | for (ResultsTy::iterator I = Results.begin(), E = Results.end(); I!=E; ++I) { |
| 3830 | if (!ResultLists.count(I->first)) |
| 3831 | PHIs.push_back(I->first); |
| 3832 | ResultLists[I->first].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, I->second)); |
| 3833 | } |
| 3834 | } |
| 3835 | |
| 3836 | // Get the resulting values for the default case. |
Hans Wennborg | 2f9fc76 | 2012-09-10 07:44:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3837 | SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode*, Constant*>, 4> DefaultResultsList; |
Hans Wennborg | ef026f1 | 2012-10-31 15:14:39 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3838 | if (!GetCaseResults(SI, 0, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, |
Hans Wennborg | e03d9e4 | 2012-10-31 13:42:45 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3839 | DefaultResultsList)) |
Hans Wennborg | 2f9fc76 | 2012-09-10 07:44:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3840 | return false; |
| 3841 | for (size_t I = 0, E = DefaultResultsList.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3842 | PHINode *PHI = DefaultResultsList[I].first; |
| 3843 | Constant *Result = DefaultResultsList[I].second; |
| 3844 | DefaultResults[PHI] = Result; |
| 3845 | ResultTypes[PHI] = Result->getType(); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3846 | } |
| 3847 | |
| 3848 | APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue(); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3849 | uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1; |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3850 | if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, TD, ResultTypes)) |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3851 | return false; |
| 3852 | |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3853 | // Create the BB that does the lookups. |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3854 | Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent(); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3855 | BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), |
| 3856 | "switch.lookup", |
| 3857 | CommonDest->getParent(), |
| 3858 | CommonDest); |
| 3859 | |
| 3860 | // Check whether the condition value is within the case range, and branch to |
| 3861 | // the new BB. |
| 3862 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI); |
| 3863 | Value *TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal, |
| 3864 | "switch.tableidx"); |
| 3865 | Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(TableIndex, ConstantInt::get( |
| 3866 | MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize)); |
| 3867 | Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest()); |
| 3868 | |
| 3869 | // Populate the BB that does the lookups. |
| 3870 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB); |
| 3871 | bool ReturnedEarly = false; |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3872 | for (size_t I = 0, E = PHIs.size(); I != E; ++I) { |
| 3873 | PHINode *PHI = PHIs[I]; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3874 | |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3875 | SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultLists[PHI], |
Hans Wennborg | d72271c | 2012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3876 | DefaultResults[PHI], TD); |
Hans Wennborg | db5dbf0 | 2012-09-26 09:34:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3877 | |
| 3878 | Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3879 | |
Hans Wennborg | 57933e3 | 2012-09-19 14:24:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3880 | // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to |
| 3881 | // do that right here. |
| 3882 | if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->use_begin()) && |
| 3883 | *PHI->use_begin() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) { |
| 3884 | Builder.CreateRet(Result); |
| 3885 | ReturnedEarly = true; |
| 3886 | break; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3887 | } |
| 3888 | |
Hans Wennborg | 57933e3 | 2012-09-19 14:24:21 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3889 | PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB); |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3890 | } |
| 3891 | |
| 3892 | if (!ReturnedEarly) |
| 3893 | Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest); |
| 3894 | |
| 3895 | // Remove the switch. |
| 3896 | for (unsigned i = 0; i < SI->getNumSuccessors(); ++i) { |
| 3897 | BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i); |
| 3898 | if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest()) continue; |
| 3899 | Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent()); |
| 3900 | } |
| 3901 | SI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 3902 | |
| 3903 | ++NumLookupTables; |
| 3904 | return true; |
| 3905 | } |
| 3906 | |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3907 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3908 | BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent(); |
| 3909 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | e5a7a68 | 2012-10-25 18:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3910 | if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) { |
| 3911 | // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value, |
| 3912 | // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch. |
| 3913 | if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) |
| 3914 | if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3915 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3916 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | e5a7a68 | 2012-10-25 18:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3917 | Value *Cond = SI->getCondition(); |
| 3918 | if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond)) |
| 3919 | if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3920 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Frits van Bommel | f7b2a9d | 2011-02-28 09:44:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3921 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | e5a7a68 | 2012-10-25 18:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3922 | // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block |
| 3923 | // away into any preds. |
| 3924 | BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); |
| 3925 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 3926 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI)) |
| 3927 | ++BBI; |
| 3928 | if (SI == &*BBI) |
| 3929 | if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3930 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | e5a7a68 | 2012-10-25 18:51:15 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3931 | } |
Benjamin Kramer | 56442df | 2011-02-02 15:56:22 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3932 | |
| 3933 | // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch. |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3934 | if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3935 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3936 | |
| 3937 | // Remove unreachable cases. |
| 3938 | if (EliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3939 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Benjamin Kramer | 10fcfb5 | 2011-05-14 15:57:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3940 | |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3941 | if (ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3942 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Hans Wennborg | 448da51 | 2011-06-18 10:28:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3943 | |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3944 | if (SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, TTI, TD)) |
| 3945 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Hans Wennborg | 486270a | 2012-09-06 09:43:28 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3946 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3947 | return false; |
| 3948 | } |
| 3949 | |
| 3950 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) { |
| 3951 | BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent(); |
| 3952 | bool Changed = false; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3953 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3954 | // Eliminate redundant destinations. |
| 3955 | SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs; |
| 3956 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) { |
| 3957 | BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i); |
| 3958 | if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest)) { |
| 3959 | Dest->removePredecessor(BB); |
| 3960 | IBI->removeDestination(i); |
| 3961 | --i; --e; |
| 3962 | Changed = true; |
| 3963 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3964 | } |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3965 | |
| 3966 | if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) { |
| 3967 | // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable. |
| 3968 | new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI); |
| 3969 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI); |
| 3970 | return true; |
| 3971 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3972 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3973 | if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) { |
| 3974 | // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch. |
| 3975 | BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI); |
| 3976 | EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI); |
| 3977 | return true; |
| 3978 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3979 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3980 | if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) { |
| 3981 | if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3982 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3983 | } |
| 3984 | return Changed; |
| 3985 | } |
| 3986 | |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3987 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder){ |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3988 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3989 | |
Manman Ren | 554da1a | 2012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3990 | if (SinkCommon && SinkThenElseCodeToEnd(BI)) |
| 3991 | return true; |
| 3992 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3993 | // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block. |
Rafael Espindola | 77a2c37 | 2011-06-30 20:14:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3994 | BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbgOrLifetime(); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3995 | if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() && |
| 3996 | TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB)) |
| 3997 | return true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3998 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 3999 | // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison |
| 4000 | // against a constant, try to simplify the block. |
| 4001 | if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) |
| 4002 | if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) { |
| 4003 | for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I) |
| 4004 | ; |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4005 | if (I->isTerminator() && |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4006 | TryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, TTI, TD)) |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4007 | return true; |
| 4008 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4009 | |
Manman Ren | ee28e0f | 2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4010 | // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor |
| 4011 | // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the |
| 4012 | // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value |
| 4013 | // for PHI nodes in common successor. |
| 4014 | if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4015 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4016 | return false; |
| 4017 | } |
| 4018 | |
| 4019 | |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4020 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) { |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4021 | BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent(); |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4022 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4023 | // Conditional branch |
| 4024 | if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) { |
| 4025 | // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value, |
| 4026 | // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this |
| 4027 | // switch. |
| 4028 | if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4029 | if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4030 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4031 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4032 | // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists. |
| 4033 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 4034 | BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); |
| 4035 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 4036 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) |
| 4037 | ++I; |
| 4038 | if (&*I == BI) { |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4039 | if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4040 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4041 | } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())){ |
| 4042 | ++I; |
| 4043 | // Ignore dbg intrinsics. |
| 4044 | while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) |
| 4045 | ++I; |
Devang Patel | b55d924 | 2011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4046 | if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4047 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4048 | } |
| 4049 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4050 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4051 | // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction. |
Devang Patel | 02dd541 | 2011-05-18 23:18:47 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4052 | if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, TD, Builder)) |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4053 | return true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4054 | |
Dan Gohman | 3b20517 | 2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4055 | // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor |
| 4056 | // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the |
| 4057 | // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination. |
| 4058 | if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4059 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4060 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4061 | // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable |
| 4062 | // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if |
| 4063 | // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we |
| 4064 | // can hoist it up to the branching block. |
| 4065 | if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor() != 0) { |
| 4066 | if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor() != 0) { |
Rafael Espindola | 216dde9 | 2011-05-19 02:26:30 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4067 | if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4068 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4069 | } else { |
| 4070 | // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally |
| 4071 | // execute Successor #0 if it branches to successor #1. |
| 4072 | TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator(); |
| 4073 | if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 && |
| 4074 | Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4075 | if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0))) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4076 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4077 | } |
| 4078 | } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor() != 0) { |
| 4079 | // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally |
| 4080 | // execute Successor #1 if it branches to successor #0. |
| 4081 | TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator(); |
| 4082 | if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 && |
| 4083 | Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) |
Chandler Carruth | 455151e | 2013-01-27 06:42:03 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4084 | if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1))) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4085 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4086 | } |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4087 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4088 | // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control |
| 4089 | // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants. |
| 4090 | if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition())) |
| 4091 | if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent()) |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4092 | if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, TD)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4093 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4094 | |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4095 | // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches. |
| 4096 | for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) |
| 4097 | if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator())) |
| 4098 | if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional()) |
| 4099 | if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI)) |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4100 | return SimplifyCFG(BB, TTI, TD) | true; |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4101 | |
| 4102 | return false; |
| 4103 | } |
| 4104 | |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4105 | /// If \param [in] BB has more than one predecessor that is a conditional |
| 4106 | /// branch, attempt to use parallel and/or for the branch condition. \returns |
| 4107 | /// true on success. |
| 4108 | /// |
| 4109 | /// Before: |
| 4110 | /// ...... |
| 4111 | /// %cmp10 = fcmp une float %tmp1, %tmp2 |
| 4112 | /// br i1 %cmp1, label %if.then, label %lor.rhs |
| 4113 | /// |
| 4114 | /// lor.rhs: |
| 4115 | /// ...... |
| 4116 | /// %cmp11 = fcmp une float %tmp3, %tmp4 |
| 4117 | /// br i1 %cmp11, label %if.then, label %ifend |
| 4118 | /// |
| 4119 | /// if.end: // the merge block |
| 4120 | /// ...... |
| 4121 | /// |
| 4122 | /// if.then: // has two predecessors, both of them contains conditional branch. |
| 4123 | /// ...... |
| 4124 | /// br label %if.end; |
| 4125 | /// |
| 4126 | /// After: |
| 4127 | /// ...... |
| 4128 | /// %cmp10 = fcmp une float %tmp1, %tmp2 |
| 4129 | /// ...... |
| 4130 | /// %cmp11 = fcmp une float %tmp3, %tmp4 |
| 4131 | /// %cmp12 = or i1 %cmp10, %cmp11 // parallel-or mode. |
| 4132 | /// br i1 %cmp12, label %if.then, label %ifend |
| 4133 | /// |
| 4134 | /// if.end: |
| 4135 | /// ...... |
| 4136 | /// |
| 4137 | /// if.then: |
| 4138 | /// ...... |
| 4139 | /// br label %if.end; |
| 4140 | /// |
| 4141 | /// Current implementation handles two cases. |
| 4142 | /// Case 1: \param BB is on the else-path. |
| 4143 | /// |
| 4144 | /// BB1 |
| 4145 | /// / | |
| 4146 | /// BB2 | |
| 4147 | /// / \ | |
| 4148 | /// BB3 \ | where, BB1, BB2 contain conditional branches. |
| 4149 | /// \ | / BB3 contains unconditional branch. |
| 4150 | /// \ | / BB4 corresponds to \param BB which is also the merge. |
| 4151 | /// BB => BB4 |
| 4152 | /// |
| 4153 | /// |
| 4154 | /// Corresponding source code: |
| 4155 | /// |
| 4156 | /// if (a == b && c == d) |
| 4157 | /// statement; // BB3 |
| 4158 | /// |
| 4159 | /// Case 2: \param BB BB is on the then-path. |
| 4160 | /// |
| 4161 | /// BB1 |
| 4162 | /// / | |
| 4163 | /// | BB2 |
| 4164 | /// \ / | where BB1, BB2 contain conditional branches. |
| 4165 | /// BB => BB3 | BB3 contains unconditiona branch and corresponds |
| 4166 | /// \ / to \param BB. BB4 is the merge. |
| 4167 | /// BB4 |
| 4168 | /// |
| 4169 | /// Corresponding source code: |
| 4170 | /// |
| 4171 | /// if (a == b || c == d) |
| 4172 | /// statement; // BB3 |
| 4173 | /// |
| 4174 | /// In both cases, \param BB is the common successor of conditional branches. |
| 4175 | /// In Case 1, \param BB (BB4) has an unconditional branch (BB3) as |
| 4176 | /// its predecessor. In Case 2, \param BB (BB3) only has conditional branches |
| 4177 | /// as its predecessors. |
| 4178 | /// |
| 4179 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyParallelAndOr(BasicBlock *BB, IRBuilder<> &Builder, |
| 4180 | Pass *P) { |
| 4181 | PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()); |
| 4182 | if (PHI) |
| 4183 | return false; // For simplicity, avoid cases containing PHI nodes. |
| 4184 | |
| 4185 | BasicBlock *LastCondBlock = NULL; |
| 4186 | BasicBlock *FirstCondBlock = NULL; |
| 4187 | BasicBlock *UnCondBlock = NULL; |
| 4188 | int Idx = -1; |
| 4189 | |
| 4190 | // Check predecessors of \param BB. |
| 4191 | SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock*, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB)); |
| 4192 | for (SmallPtrSetIterator<BasicBlock*> PI = Preds.begin(), PE = Preds.end(); |
| 4193 | PI != PE; ++PI) { |
| 4194 | BasicBlock *Pred = *PI; |
| 4195 | BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()); |
| 4196 | |
| 4197 | // All predecessors should terminate with a branch. |
| 4198 | if (!PBI) |
| 4199 | return false; |
| 4200 | |
| 4201 | BasicBlock *PP = Pred->getSinglePredecessor(); |
| 4202 | |
| 4203 | if (PBI->isUnconditional()) { |
| 4204 | // Case 1: Pred (BB3) is an unconditional block, it should |
| 4205 | // have a single predecessor (BB2) that is also a predecessor |
| 4206 | // of \param BB (BB4) and should not have address-taken. |
| 4207 | // There should exist only one such unconditional |
| 4208 | // branch among the predecessors. |
| 4209 | if (UnCondBlock || !PP || (Preds.count(PP) == 0) || |
| 4210 | Pred->hasAddressTaken()) |
| 4211 | return false; |
| 4212 | |
| 4213 | UnCondBlock = Pred; |
| 4214 | continue; |
| 4215 | } |
| 4216 | |
| 4217 | // Only conditional branches are allowed beyond this point. |
| 4218 | assert(PBI->isConditional()); |
| 4219 | |
| 4220 | // Condition's unique use should be the branch instruction. |
| 4221 | Value *PC = PBI->getCondition(); |
| 4222 | if (!PC || !PC->hasOneUse()) |
| 4223 | return false; |
| 4224 | |
| 4225 | if (PP && Preds.count(PP)) { |
| 4226 | // These are internal condition blocks to be merged from, e.g., |
| 4227 | // BB2 in both cases. |
| 4228 | // Should not be address-taken. |
| 4229 | if (Pred->hasAddressTaken()) |
| 4230 | return false; |
| 4231 | |
| 4232 | // Instructions in the internal condition blocks should be safe |
| 4233 | // to hoist up. |
| 4234 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = Pred->begin(), BE = PBI; BI != BE;) { |
| 4235 | Instruction *CI = BI++; |
| 4236 | if (isa<PHINode>(CI) || |
| 4237 | !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(CI)) |
| 4238 | return false; |
| 4239 | } |
| 4240 | } else { |
| 4241 | // This is the condition block to be merged into, e.g. BB1 in |
| 4242 | // both cases. |
| 4243 | if (FirstCondBlock) |
| 4244 | return false; |
| 4245 | FirstCondBlock = Pred; |
| 4246 | } |
| 4247 | |
| 4248 | // Find whether BB is uniformly on the true (or false) path |
| 4249 | // for all of its predecessors. |
| 4250 | BasicBlock *PS1 = PBI->getSuccessor(0); |
| 4251 | BasicBlock *PS2 = PBI->getSuccessor(1); |
| 4252 | BasicBlock *PS = (PS1 == BB) ? PS2 : PS1; |
| 4253 | int CIdx = (PS1 == BB) ? 0 : 1; |
| 4254 | |
| 4255 | if (Idx == -1) |
| 4256 | Idx = CIdx; |
| 4257 | else if (CIdx != Idx) |
| 4258 | return false; |
| 4259 | |
| 4260 | // PS is the successor which is not BB. Check successors to identify |
| 4261 | // the last conditional branch. |
| 4262 | if (Preds.count(PS) == 0) { |
| 4263 | // Case 2. |
| 4264 | // BB must have an unique successor. |
| 4265 | TerminatorInst *TBB = BB->getTerminator(); |
| 4266 | if (TBB->getNumSuccessors() != 1) |
| 4267 | return false; |
| 4268 | |
| 4269 | BasicBlock *SBB = TBB->getSuccessor(0); |
| 4270 | PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SBB->begin()); |
| 4271 | if (PHI) |
| 4272 | return false; |
| 4273 | |
| 4274 | // PS (BB4) should be BB's successor. |
| 4275 | if (SBB != PS) |
| 4276 | return false; |
| 4277 | LastCondBlock = Pred; |
| 4278 | } else { |
| 4279 | BranchInst *BPS = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PS->getTerminator()); |
| 4280 | if (BPS && BPS->isUnconditional()) { |
| 4281 | // Case 1: PS(BB3) should be an unconditional branch. |
| 4282 | LastCondBlock = Pred; |
| 4283 | } |
| 4284 | } |
| 4285 | } |
| 4286 | |
| 4287 | if (!FirstCondBlock || !LastCondBlock || (FirstCondBlock == LastCondBlock)) |
| 4288 | return false; |
| 4289 | |
| 4290 | // Do the transformation. |
| 4291 | BasicBlock *CB; |
| 4292 | bool Iteration = true; |
Alexey Samsonov | e393b73 | 2013-08-02 08:06:43 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4293 | BasicBlock *SaveInsertBB = Builder.GetInsertBlock(); |
| 4294 | BasicBlock::iterator SaveInsertPt = Builder.GetInsertPoint(); |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4295 | BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(FirstCondBlock->getTerminator()); |
| 4296 | Value *PC = PBI->getCondition(); |
| 4297 | do { |
| 4298 | CB = PBI->getSuccessor(1 - Idx); |
| 4299 | // Delete the conditional branch. |
| 4300 | FirstCondBlock->getInstList().pop_back(); |
| 4301 | FirstCondBlock->getInstList().splice(FirstCondBlock->end(), CB->getInstList()); |
| 4302 | PBI = cast<BranchInst>(FirstCondBlock->getTerminator()); |
| 4303 | Value *CC = PBI->getCondition(); |
| 4304 | // Merge conditions. |
| 4305 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(PBI); |
| 4306 | Value *NC; |
| 4307 | if (Idx == 0) |
| 4308 | // Case 2, use parallel or. |
| 4309 | NC = Builder.CreateOr(PC, CC); |
| 4310 | else |
| 4311 | // Case 1, use parallel and. |
| 4312 | NC = Builder.CreateAnd(PC, CC); |
| 4313 | |
| 4314 | PBI->replaceUsesOfWith(CC, NC); |
| 4315 | PC = NC; |
| 4316 | if (CB == LastCondBlock) |
| 4317 | Iteration = false; |
| 4318 | // Remove internal conditional branches. |
| 4319 | CB->dropAllReferences(); |
| 4320 | // make CB unreachable and let downstream to delete the block. |
| 4321 | new UnreachableInst(CB->getContext(), CB); |
| 4322 | } while (Iteration); |
Alexey Samsonov | e393b73 | 2013-08-02 08:06:43 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4323 | if (SaveInsertBB) |
| 4324 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(SaveInsertBB, SaveInsertPt); |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4325 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Use parallel and/or in:\n" << *FirstCondBlock); |
| 4326 | return true; |
| 4327 | } |
| 4328 | |
| 4329 | /// Compare blocks from two if-regions, where \param Head1 is the entry of the |
| 4330 | /// 1st if-region. \param Head2 is the entry of the 2nd if-region. \param |
| 4331 | /// Block1 is a block in the 1st if-region to compare. \param Block2 is a block |
| 4332 | // in the 2nd if-region to compare. \returns true if \param Block1 and \param |
| 4333 | /// Block2 have identical instructions and do not have memory reference alias |
| 4334 | /// with \param Head2. |
| 4335 | /// |
| 4336 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::CompareIfRegionBlock(BasicBlock *Head1, BasicBlock *Head2, |
| 4337 | BasicBlock *Block1, BasicBlock *Block2) { |
| 4338 | TerminatorInst *PTI2 = Head2->getTerminator(); |
| 4339 | Instruction *PBI2 = Head2->begin(); |
| 4340 | |
| 4341 | bool eq1 = (Block1 == Head1); |
| 4342 | bool eq2 = (Block2 == Head2); |
| 4343 | if (eq1 || eq2) { |
| 4344 | // An empty then-path or else-path. |
| 4345 | return (eq1 == eq2); |
| 4346 | } |
| 4347 | |
| 4348 | // Check whether instructions in Block1 and Block2 are identical |
| 4349 | // and do not alias with instructions in Head2. |
| 4350 | BasicBlock::iterator iter1 = Block1->begin(); |
| 4351 | BasicBlock::iterator end1 = Block1->getTerminator(); |
| 4352 | BasicBlock::iterator iter2 = Block2->begin(); |
| 4353 | BasicBlock::iterator end2 = Block2->getTerminator(); |
| 4354 | |
| 4355 | while (1) { |
| 4356 | if (iter1 == end1) { |
| 4357 | if (iter2 != end2) |
| 4358 | return false; |
| 4359 | break; |
| 4360 | } |
| 4361 | |
| 4362 | if (!iter1->isIdenticalTo(iter2)) |
| 4363 | return false; |
| 4364 | |
| 4365 | // Illegal to remove instructions with side effects except |
| 4366 | // non-volatile stores. |
| 4367 | if (iter1->mayHaveSideEffects()) { |
| 4368 | Instruction *CurI = &*iter1; |
| 4369 | StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(CurI); |
| 4370 | if (!SI || SI->isVolatile()) |
| 4371 | return false; |
| 4372 | } |
| 4373 | |
| 4374 | // For simplicity and speed, data dependency check can be |
| 4375 | // avoided if read from memory doesn't exist. |
| 4376 | if (iter1->mayReadFromMemory()) |
| 4377 | return false; |
| 4378 | |
| 4379 | if (iter1->mayWriteToMemory()) { |
| 4380 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = PBI2, BE = PTI2; BI != BE; ++BI) { |
| 4381 | if (BI->mayReadFromMemory() || BI->mayWriteToMemory()) { |
| 4382 | // Check alias with Head2. |
| 4383 | if (!AA || AA->alias(iter1, BI)) |
| 4384 | return false; |
| 4385 | } |
| 4386 | } |
| 4387 | } |
| 4388 | ++iter1; |
| 4389 | ++iter2; |
| 4390 | } |
| 4391 | |
| 4392 | return true; |
| 4393 | } |
| 4394 | |
| 4395 | /// Check whether \param BB is the merge block of a if-region. If yes, check |
| 4396 | /// whether there exists an adjacent if-region upstream, the two if-regions |
| 4397 | /// contain identical instuctions and can be legally merged. \returns true if |
| 4398 | /// the two if-regions are merged. |
| 4399 | /// |
| 4400 | /// From: |
| 4401 | /// if (a) |
| 4402 | /// statement; |
| 4403 | /// if (b) |
| 4404 | /// statement; |
| 4405 | /// |
| 4406 | /// To: |
| 4407 | /// if (a || b) |
| 4408 | /// statement; |
| 4409 | /// |
| 4410 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::MergeIfRegion(BasicBlock *BB, IRBuilder<> &Builder, |
| 4411 | Pass *P) { |
| 4412 | BasicBlock *IfTrue2, *IfFalse2; |
| 4413 | Value *IfCond2 = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue2, IfFalse2); |
| 4414 | Instruction *CInst2 = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(IfCond2); |
| 4415 | if (!CInst2) |
| 4416 | return false; |
| 4417 | |
| 4418 | BasicBlock *SecondEntryBlock = CInst2->getParent(); |
| 4419 | if (SecondEntryBlock->hasAddressTaken()) |
| 4420 | return false; |
| 4421 | |
| 4422 | BasicBlock *IfTrue1, *IfFalse1; |
| 4423 | Value *IfCond1 = GetIfCondition(SecondEntryBlock, IfTrue1, IfFalse1); |
| 4424 | Instruction *CInst1 = dyn_cast_or_null<Instruction>(IfCond1); |
| 4425 | if (!CInst1) |
| 4426 | return false; |
| 4427 | |
| 4428 | BasicBlock *FirstEntryBlock = CInst1->getParent(); |
| 4429 | |
| 4430 | // Either then-path or else-path should be empty. |
| 4431 | if ((IfTrue1 != FirstEntryBlock) && (IfFalse1 != FirstEntryBlock)) |
| 4432 | return false; |
| 4433 | if ((IfTrue2 != SecondEntryBlock) && (IfFalse2 != SecondEntryBlock)) |
| 4434 | return false; |
| 4435 | |
| 4436 | TerminatorInst *PTI2 = SecondEntryBlock->getTerminator(); |
| 4437 | Instruction *PBI2 = SecondEntryBlock->begin(); |
| 4438 | |
| 4439 | if (!CompareIfRegionBlock(FirstEntryBlock, SecondEntryBlock, IfTrue1, IfTrue2)) |
| 4440 | return false; |
| 4441 | |
| 4442 | if (!CompareIfRegionBlock(FirstEntryBlock, SecondEntryBlock, IfFalse1, IfFalse2)) |
| 4443 | return false; |
| 4444 | |
| 4445 | // Check whether \param SecondEntryBlock has side-effect and is safe to speculate. |
| 4446 | for (BasicBlock::iterator BI = PBI2, BE = PTI2; BI != BE; ++BI) { |
| 4447 | Instruction *CI = BI; |
| 4448 | if (isa<PHINode>(CI) || CI->mayHaveSideEffects() || |
| 4449 | !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(CI)) |
| 4450 | return false; |
| 4451 | } |
| 4452 | |
| 4453 | // Merge \param SecondEntryBlock into \param FirstEntryBlock. |
| 4454 | FirstEntryBlock->getInstList().pop_back(); |
| 4455 | FirstEntryBlock->getInstList().splice(FirstEntryBlock->end(), SecondEntryBlock->getInstList()); |
| 4456 | BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(FirstEntryBlock->getTerminator()); |
| 4457 | Value *CC = PBI->getCondition(); |
Alexey Samsonov | e393b73 | 2013-08-02 08:06:43 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4458 | BasicBlock *SaveInsertBB = Builder.GetInsertBlock(); |
| 4459 | BasicBlock::iterator SaveInsertPt = Builder.GetInsertPoint(); |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4460 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(PBI); |
| 4461 | Value *NC = Builder.CreateOr(CInst1, CC); |
| 4462 | PBI->replaceUsesOfWith(CC, NC); |
Alexey Samsonov | e393b73 | 2013-08-02 08:06:43 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4463 | if (SaveInsertBB) |
| 4464 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(SaveInsertBB, SaveInsertPt); |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4465 | |
| 4466 | // Remove IfTrue1 |
| 4467 | if (IfTrue1 != FirstEntryBlock) { |
| 4468 | IfTrue1->dropAllReferences(); |
| 4469 | IfTrue1->eraseFromParent(); |
| 4470 | } |
| 4471 | |
| 4472 | // Remove IfFalse1 |
| 4473 | if (IfFalse1 != FirstEntryBlock) { |
| 4474 | IfFalse1->dropAllReferences(); |
| 4475 | IfFalse1->eraseFromParent(); |
| 4476 | } |
| 4477 | |
| 4478 | // Remove \param SecondEntryBlock |
| 4479 | SecondEntryBlock->dropAllReferences(); |
| 4480 | SecondEntryBlock->eraseFromParent(); |
| 4481 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "If conditions merged into:\n" << *FirstEntryBlock); |
| 4482 | return true; |
| 4483 | } |
| 4484 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4485 | /// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior. |
| 4486 | static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) { |
| 4487 | Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V); |
| 4488 | if (!C) |
| 4489 | return false; |
| 4490 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 1e21db6 | 2012-10-04 16:11:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4491 | if (I->use_empty()) |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4492 | return false; |
| 4493 | |
| 4494 | if (C->isNullValue()) { |
Benjamin Kramer | 1e21db6 | 2012-10-04 16:11:49 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4495 | // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists |
| 4496 | User *Use = *I->use_begin(); |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4497 | |
| 4498 | // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter |
| 4499 | // control flow (eg. calls) |
| 4500 | for (BasicBlock::iterator i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I); &*i != Use; ++i) |
Benjamin Kramer | 9bb5488 | 2011-08-26 02:25:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4501 | if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects()) |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4502 | return false; |
| 4503 | |
| 4504 | // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined |
| 4505 | if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use)) |
| 4506 | if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I) |
| 4507 | return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP); |
| 4508 | |
| 4509 | // Look through bitcasts. |
| 4510 | if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use)) |
| 4511 | return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC); |
| 4512 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 9bb5488 | 2011-08-26 02:25:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4513 | // Load from null is undefined. |
| 4514 | if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use)) |
Andrew Trick | 119003f | 2013-03-07 01:03:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4515 | if (!LI->isVolatile()) |
| 4516 | return LI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0; |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4517 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 9bb5488 | 2011-08-26 02:25:55 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4518 | // Store to null is undefined. |
| 4519 | if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use)) |
Andrew Trick | 119003f | 2013-03-07 01:03:35 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4520 | if (!SI->isVolatile()) |
| 4521 | return SI->getPointerAddressSpace() == 0 && SI->getPointerOperand() == I; |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4522 | } |
| 4523 | return false; |
| 4524 | } |
| 4525 | |
| 4526 | /// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior |
Nick Lewycky | 9d52310 | 2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4527 | /// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here. |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4528 | static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) { |
| 4529 | for (BasicBlock::iterator i = BB->begin(); |
| 4530 | PHINode *PHI = dyn_cast<PHINode>(i); ++i) |
| 4531 | for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) |
| 4532 | if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI->getIncomingValue(i), PHI)) { |
| 4533 | TerminatorInst *T = PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator(); |
| 4534 | IRBuilder<> Builder(T); |
| 4535 | if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) { |
| 4536 | BB->removePredecessor(PHI->getIncomingBlock(i)); |
| 4537 | // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead |
| 4538 | // destination from conditional branches. |
| 4539 | if (BI->isUnconditional()) |
| 4540 | Builder.CreateUnreachable(); |
| 4541 | else |
| 4542 | Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : |
| 4543 | BI->getSuccessor(0)); |
| 4544 | BI->eraseFromParent(); |
| 4545 | return true; |
| 4546 | } |
| 4547 | // TODO: SwitchInst. |
| 4548 | } |
| 4549 | |
| 4550 | return false; |
| 4551 | } |
| 4552 | |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4553 | bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) { |
Chris Lattner | dc3602b | 2003-08-24 18:36:16 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4554 | bool Changed = false; |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4555 | |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4556 | assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!"); |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4557 | assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!"); |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4558 | |
Dan Gohman | e2c6d13 | 2010-08-14 00:29:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4559 | // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)... |
| 4560 | // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable. |
Chris Lattner | 302ba6f | 2010-12-14 06:17:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4561 | if ((pred_begin(BB) == pred_end(BB) && |
| 4562 | BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) || |
Dan Gohman | e2c6d13 | 2010-08-14 00:29:42 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4563 | BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) { |
David Greene | 89d6fd3 | 2010-01-05 01:26:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4564 | DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB); |
Chris Lattner | 71af9b0 | 2008-12-03 06:40:52 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4565 | DeleteDeadBlock(BB); |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4566 | return true; |
| 4567 | } |
| 4568 | |
Chris Lattner | 694e37f | 2003-08-17 19:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4569 | // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction |
| 4570 | // away... |
Frits van Bommel | 5649ba7 | 2011-05-22 16:24:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4571 | Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true); |
Chris Lattner | 694e37f | 2003-08-17 19:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4572 | |
Dan Gohman | 2c63566 | 2009-10-30 22:39:04 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4573 | // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block. |
| 4574 | Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB); |
| 4575 | |
Benjamin Kramer | 98d6d23 | 2011-08-26 01:22:29 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4576 | // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior. |
| 4577 | Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB); |
| 4578 | |
Chris Lattner | ddb97a2 | 2010-12-13 05:10:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4579 | // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct |
| 4580 | // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and |
| 4581 | // if there are no PHI nodes. |
| 4582 | // |
| 4583 | if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB)) |
| 4584 | return true; |
Andrew Trick | 6b01438 | 2012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4585 | |
Devang Patel | 3e410c6 | 2011-05-18 18:01:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4586 | IRBuilder<> Builder(BB); |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4587 | // Whether to optimize conditional branches. |
| 4588 | bool OptCB = (ParallelAndOr && AA && TTI.hasBranchDivergence()); |
| 4589 | |
| 4590 | if (OptCB && SimplifyParallelAndOr(BB, Builder)) |
| 4591 | return true; |
Devang Patel | 3e410c6 | 2011-05-18 18:01:27 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4592 | |
Dan Gohman | 882d87d | 2008-03-11 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4593 | // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can |
| 4594 | // eliminate it, do so now. |
| 4595 | if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) |
| 4596 | if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2) |
Devang Patel | d3a1788 | 2011-05-19 20:52:46 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4597 | Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TD); |
Dan Gohman | 882d87d | 2008-03-11 21:53:06 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4598 | |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4599 | Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator()); |
Chris Lattner | 3d51213 | 2010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4600 | if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4601 | if (BI->isUnconditional()) { |
Devang Patel | a23812c | 2011-05-18 18:28:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4602 | if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4603 | } else { |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4604 | if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4605 | } |
| 4606 | } else if (ReturnInst *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
Devang Patel | 176ec40 | 2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4607 | if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder)) return true; |
Bill Wendling | aa5abe8 | 2012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4608 | } else if (ResumeInst *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
| 4609 | if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4610 | } else if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
Devang Patel | 007349d | 2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4611 | if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4612 | } else if (UnreachableInst *UI = |
| 4613 | dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
| 4614 | if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 021c9d3 | 2010-12-13 06:36:51 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4615 | } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = |
| 4616 | dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) { |
| 4617 | if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI)) return true; |
Chris Lattner | 19831ec | 2004-02-16 06:35:48 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4618 | } |
| 4619 | |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4620 | if (OptCB && MergeIfRegion(BB, Builder)) |
| 4621 | return true; |
| 4622 | |
Chris Lattner | 694e37f | 2003-08-17 19:41:53 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4623 | return Changed; |
Chris Lattner | 01d1ee3 | 2002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4624 | } |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4625 | |
| 4626 | /// SimplifyCFG - This function is used to do simplification of a CFG. For |
| 4627 | /// example, it adjusts branches to branches to eliminate the extra hop, it |
| 4628 | /// eliminates unreachable basic blocks, and does other "peephole" optimization |
| 4629 | /// of the CFG. It returns true if a modification was made. |
| 4630 | /// |
Chandler Carruth | 5f46c3c | 2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4631 | bool llvm::SimplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, |
Tom Stellard | 57e6b2d | 2013-07-27 00:01:07 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4632 | const DataLayout *TD, AliasAnalysis *AA) { |
| 4633 | return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, TD, AA).run(BB); |
Jakob Stoklund Olesen | 58e9ee8 | 2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000 | [diff] [blame] | 4634 | } |